JP2019037883A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with further improved interest in games.SOLUTION: When any one of first identification information or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is still being in a dynamic display, the dynamic display is stopped and displayed by stop display means in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode. If a long state is being set by setting means, another setting means is provided for making a second privilege easy to be set in a first lottery by privilege determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies a lottery of a game when a game ball enters a start opening provided on a game board surface and notifies the lottery result. Executed in If the lottery result is a win, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined to win is high after a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed is also provided at the starting point. It is executed based on the game ball being entered. When it is set to the high probability gaming state, if it is decided to shift to the normal probability gaming state in the case of winning in the high probability gaming state, a configuration to shift to the normal probability gaming is proposed. ing.

JP 2005-319221 A

  By the way, in the above configuration, there is no sharpness in the game, and further improvement of the interest of the game has been demanded.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game in the above gaming machine.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance. The first lottery is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance, and the player is more advantageous than the first lottery based on the game ball entering the second entrance. The lottery means for executing the second lottery, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means, and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means capable of dynamic display, respectively, and dynamic display period determination for respectively determining the dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means And a dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display determination means. Setting means capable of setting a long state in which a dynamic display period longer than a dynamic display period is easily determined and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined, and the first identification When the information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the privilege granting means are given to the player. As a privilege, based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery, a privilege determining means for determining at least one of the first privilege and a second privilege that is less granted than the first privilege; , When either the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is Specific stop display state And a setting for making the second privilege easy to be determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery when the long state is set by the setting device. Means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 has gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states based on a predetermined condition in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the setting means includes the gaming state. On the condition that a specific gaming state is set by the setting means, the second benefit is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the game ball having entered the first entrance. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means.

  The dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determination means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state The short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery as the privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege that is less privileged than the first privilege are given. Either one is determined by the privilege determining means. When either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to a specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from that is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second benefit is easily set by the setting means by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Thereby, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On the condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second benefit is easily determined by the setting means by the privilege determination means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect more to determine the second privilege when a specific gaming state is set.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus of a La-La cross section, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a top view of a 1st variable winning apparatus. (A)-(b) is a partial rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the transition of the game state in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the frame button in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the selection switch in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, a special symbol reservation ball storage area, a special symbol reservation ball execution area, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area, and a normal symbol reservation ball execution area. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, c) is a diagram schematically showing a second per-random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the common figure fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 1st Embodiment, (b) is MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 removal stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the notification lottery process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 (see FIG. 11A) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11B) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol display (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), the selection switch 600 is a decision switch (a) for determining the selection of effects, the left switch 600b for instructing selection in the left direction, and for instructing selection in the upward direction. The upper switch 600c includes a right switch 600d for instructing selection in the right direction and a lower switch 600e for instructing selection in the lower direction.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first start port 63 a, 2 The start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The left first start port 630, the right first start port 631, the second start port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a first normal symbol start port 67a and a second normal symbol start port 67b are provided below the first normal symbol start port 67b. The first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b are configured in the same shape, and are configured as a start port having a gate-type sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. Yes. When a game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “O” and “X” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67 or the second normal symbol start port 67b while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display section 88, the number of passages is the same as the first normal symbol start port 67a. A total of four times is held at the second normal symbol start port 67b, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display device 37.

  When it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display section 88 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 632 is activated. The ordinary electric accessory 632 includes a left guiding member 632a and a right guiding member 632b, and is usually spaced by an interval through which one game ball can pass left and right through the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b. Time is maintained in an upright position. The left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in the present embodiment) from the state where the left guide member 632a stands substantially vertically, and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member are moved to the first position. By guiding to the 2 start opening 640, it will be in the state (special state) where a game ball is easy to enter in the 2nd start opening 640. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display section 88. At this time, the normal electric accessory 632 is not actuated, and the next normal symbol (second symbol) change is executed.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a were awarded to the left first start port 630, the right start port 631, the second start port 640, the first normal symbol start port (through gate) 67a, and the second normal symbol start port (through gate) 67b. The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) for which variation display is not executed among the spheres, is indicated by a lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (7 segments in the present embodiment) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time), which is determined based on winning in the left first start port 630 or the right second start port 631. After the center segment of FIG. 3 is blinked), the display is stopped with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed.

  A second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game (dynamic display) is displayed on the right 7-segment LED. Specifically, it is displayed until the variation time determined based on the winning at the second starting port 640 elapses, and is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  Moreover, although the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) is also applicable.

  In this pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for winning to the left first start port 63, the right second start port 631, and the second start port 640, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (big win lottery). The jackpot type is also determined. The jackpot type determined here is the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1): jackpot A (15R jackpot probable jackpot), jackpot B (15R regular jackpot), jackpot E (15R regular jackpot (electric support) Yes)) is set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of electric support for the big hit E indicates that the ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to a special state. In jackpot E, after 15 rounds of jackpot game, the electric support state is set until the total number of first lottery games and second lottery games reaches 100.

  As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot (without electric support)) are set (FIG. 16). (See (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged as a winning device that is operated in an open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 is operated so that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened 15 times for a predetermined period or until a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls enter for the jackpots A to E. Is done.

  The configuration of the first variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the first variable prize winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65 b that is arranged to project from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65 b, so that the first variable A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and a LED disposed on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an open / close for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, a back cover body 65e, and a flow path A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the bar body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and a back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. A back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side, and is attached to the back cover body 65j with screws. It is comprised with the cover body 65m for fixation for fixing.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in an inaccessible state. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the right first winning port 631 side. It is configured to be induced. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning port 640 while keeping the right-handed state even during the short-time game (including during the probability change game), and to the left-handed immediately after the big hit game The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Fig.5 (a) is La-La sectional drawing shown in FIG.5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and is guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special outlet 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special outlet 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state (probability change) by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the first variable winning slot 65 during the jackpot game, the player's interest is improved even during the jackpot game. Can do. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the shortest. . The operation of the switching member 65h is set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the 13th round. Has been. Further, when the big hit B and the big win E are won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the 13th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, it is configured that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is impossible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that an excessive advantage or disadvantage does not occur.

  With reference to FIG. 6B, the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem of winning in the probability change switch 65e3 even if the winning ball is B in the thirteenth round in a state where the game balls won before the 13th round are not discharged.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific prize opening 65a in the first variable prize winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, for one ball prize). 15 prize balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, various gaming states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flow in which various game states are set. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (when the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal gaming state is set. In this case, the variation time of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is set to be long. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17, it is configured that 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the variation time of the special figure 2 in both cases where the result of the determination of success / failure is hit and out. Mainly, the business hours of the amusement shop are about 15 hours from 9:00 am to night 11 and are set longer than that. Therefore, even if a game (right-handed game) is performed by passing the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the normal game state, the fluctuation in the special figure 2 does not end within business hours. In the normal gaming state, the electric accessory 632 is also difficult to be set to the special state. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible for the player to play the right-handed game on the left side of the variable display unit 80. It is set so as to be disadvantageous compared with passing a game (left-handed game).

  If a left-handed game is played in the normal gaming state, if the first lottery game of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, either the big hit A (15R probability variable big hit) or the big hit B (15R normal big hit) Selected. Here, in the case of jackpot B, after the jackpot game of jackpot B is executed, the normal gaming state is set. On the other hand, in the case of jackpot game A, a game state without probability change power support (latency probability change) is set. In the game state without probability transformation sub-support, the jackpot probability is set 10 times higher than the normal game state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 s). Therefore, the player can efficiently perform the second lottery game in which a lottery is performed using the second special symbol even if the player makes a right-handed game.

  Here, in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state, it is configured so that the probability variation jackpot (jackpot A) is selected at a rate of 34% when it is a jackpot, but in the second special symbol, The probability variation jackpot (jackpot C or jackpot D) is selected at a rate of 100%. Therefore, the player who is drawn by the second special symbol is configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In the game state without the promiscuous power support, if the variation time of the first special symbol is out of place, it is set to 1800000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18A). On the other hand, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms regardless of the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery of a maximum of 3600 times in the second special symbol while the first special symbol is deviated once. Since the probability of jackpot during probability change is 1/40, it is configured so that if it is a normal game, the second special symbol can be a big hit before the first special symbol that has been missed changes once. ing.

  In the game state without probability transformation sub-support, if a big hit is made in the second special symbol, jackpot D (15R probability variation big hit) is selected. After the jackpot D is executed, a gaming state with probability transformation support is set. In the gaming state with probability transformation support, the special symbol lottery probability is set to 10 times higher, the normal symbol lottery probability is set to 40 times higher, and the fluctuation time is also set to be easily selected (see FIG. 19). Further, the time (opening time) during which the electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state is also set longer than the normal gaming state and the latent probability changing gaming state. Therefore, when the player strikes right, the right first start port 631 can be easily won. In the present embodiment, 95% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls win the second entrance, and the remaining 5% is consumed as an out ball. Therefore, in the probable gaming state, about 99% of the right-handed game balls will win the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640, and 99% of the right-handed game balls play as winning balls. Paid out to the person. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease of the player's ball.

  In the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be short (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, the lottery is efficiently executed with the first special symbol. When the jackpot of the first special symbol is achieved in the probability variation gaming state, jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34%. Therefore, the latent probability changing game state is selected with a probability of 34%, and it becomes possible to play a game with a high probability until a win of at least two jackpots is won again. On the other hand, if the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal gaming state is set after the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state is set, the first lottery game or the second game with a high probability advantageous to the player until the jackpot is executed twice while the consumption of the holding ball is suppressed. A lottery game can be executed. Therefore, the player can feel that at least two jackpots are compensated when the latent probability changing gaming state is set.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is obtained in the normal gaming state, if the stored bonus ball of the first special symbol that has been stored becomes the jackpot B of the first special symbol, two jackpots are won. The normal gaming state will be set before getting. However, in the latent probability changing gaming state, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured so that 30 minutes are selected when it is out, so the second time of the first time when the latent probability varying gaming state is set. Since it is a case where a lottery game is a big hit (probability of 1/40), it is set so as not to frequently cause a disadvantage to the player.

  In addition, when the big hit is A in the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the holding ball of the first special symbol is determined first, and when the lottery result is determined to be the big hit E, the game of the big hit E Since 100 short-time games are awarded after the game is finished, the game is configured to be given a more advantageous state than the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is discouraged and the willingness to play is significantly reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 using a winning (start winning) at the left first starting port 63, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 as a trigger. However, there is provided a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. Left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right showing the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) or the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) which is one of the third symbols in the area Dm Three symbol rows in (right display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol displayed in the first display area (Dm) (whether it is special figure 1 or special figure 2) is determined and displayed according to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) and the gaming state with probability transformation support (probability gaming state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and there is no probability transformation support. In the gaming state (latency probability changing gaming state), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol type displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same special symbol may be always displayed. Good.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

  Note that the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn is formed at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state) is displayed. In the second display area Dn, two types of symbol rows “◯” and “×” as shown in FIG. 4B are displayed in parallel in two gaming states other than the probability variation gaming state. When the two “◯” symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the player is informed that the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been won. On the other hand, although details will be described later, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the treasure box symbol is displayed as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. It is displayed in the area Dn. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, a blinking display is performed in which the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B are alternately repeated with a short cycle (for example, 1 second). . And if you are in this probable gaming state,
When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, the display is stopped when the variation time elapses in the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a win, the display is stopped when the variation time elapses in the state shown in FIG. 9B.

  Furthermore, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol can be performed simultaneously. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit, the variation of the other special symbol in the variation is also forcibly deviating. It is configured to be stopped. During the probabilistic game, in addition to the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot E lotteries in the first special symbol lottery, a lottery lottery other than the jackpot is also executed. With regard to the jackpot, a jackpot of 15 rounds is executed, whereas a bonus game of 2 rounds is executed. Further, one round of jackpot game is executed until 30 seconds elapses or 10 game balls are won in the first variable winning device 65, but one round of jackpot game is 0.5 seconds. The time is set until 10 game balls win the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game, the first variable winning device 65 can hardly enter the game ball, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball.

  Here, even when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lottery result indicating the small win, the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating that it is out (see FIG. 9A). The In this case, when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate next time, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the size of the second display area Dn is expanded and the first display area Dm is expanded. The size of is reduced and displayed. When the treasure box is opened and the result of the determination is wrong, the word “sorry” is displayed from the treasure box as shown in FIG. 10 (a), and the lottery result is displayed to the player. It is displayed that it was off. On the other hand, if the determination result is a win, as shown in FIG. 10B, the word “congratulations” is displayed from the treasure box, and the player is shown that the lottery result is a win. The

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and in the normal gaming method, the lottery is mainly performed with the first special symbol. Is executed. However, according to the present embodiment, when the second lottery game with the second special symbol is a big hit, the big hit D (15R probability variable big hit) is always selected, which is advantageous to the player. It has become. Here, when the first special symbol is won in the small win, the change of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the new second special symbol is started, so the second lottery game is executed. Opportunities can be increased. Further, in that case, the second display area Dn is expanded and displayed as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, so that the player can expect a big hit with the second special symbol. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state (given after the end of jackpot E), the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. A third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the display area is based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol being displayed in the state that was displayed before the jackpot game was started, and the gaming state being switched after the jackpot game. Is switched.

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area. In the sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 8B, a reserved symbol “●” corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to 4, respectively, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols “●” are displayed in the secondary table display area Ds. .

  In this embodiment, the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are the same, but the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is “●” and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is “▲”. You may comprise so that it may distinguish and display. Further, the sub display area Ds is set to be divided into a display area for displaying the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and a display area for displaying the reserved symbol of the second special symbol (for example, the left region and the right region). Also good. Moreover, you may comprise so that a reservation symbol may be rearranged and displayed in the order of a fluctuation | variation start.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or four or more lottery games and corresponding start-ups are performed. Of course, each mouth may be provided so that the lottery results can be displayed at the same time.

  A first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 when a game ball wins the left first start port 63, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640. Is turned on. The left first start port 63 and the right first start port 631 are formed on the back side of the game board 13 with a common guide path through which the game balls entered are guided to the first start port switch. The main control device 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the left first start port 63, the right second start port 631, and the second start port 640 are also one of the winning ports from which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball is won.

  When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the variation is forcibly terminated if the other special symbol is being variably displayed. In the present embodiment, when a change that results in a big hit in one special symbol has been started, the special symbol that starts changing after the other is forcedly changed as a result of lottery. Is configured to start. Thereby, the malfunction that a jackpot game is started continuously or a jackpot game is started simultaneously can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery game is executed with one special symbol, the other lottery game is forcibly executed on the other side. You may comprise so that the lottery game as a lottery result may be performed and a jackpot game may be started continuously. Further, when either of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, the measurement of the variation time may be interrupted and the remaining fluctuation display may be continued after the big hit. In this case, during interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode “for example, alphabet h” in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any winning opening 63 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About configuration>
With reference to FIG. 2, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be further described in detail. In the present embodiment, a left-side channel in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right-side channel in which the right side of the variable display unit 80 flows down are formed. A left first starting port 63 is disposed below the center of the variable display unit 80, and is mainly configured so that a game ball flowing down the left channel is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the right channel. ing.

  A first normal symbol starting port 67a is arranged in the right channel, a first variable winning device 65 is arranged below it, a right first starting port 631 is arranged below it, and a second is placed on the right side. A normal symbol start port 67b is arranged. A second start port 640 is disposed below the right first start port 631. The game board 13 is provided with a plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball.

  The game ball launched into the right channel is inserted into the right first starting port 631 when the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b stand up) by the nail T4. It is configured not to sphere. When the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel are configured to flow down the left side of the right first start port 631. Note that the ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting port 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the first variable winning device 65, the width through which the game ball can pass is increased, and the rate at which the game ball flows down to the right side of the right first start port 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 toward the right first starting port 631, the width through which the game ball can pass is narrowed, and the proportion of game balls flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 can be increased.

  The game ball that has flowed down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by a nail group T3 (configured by five nails). The nail group T3 is arranged such that the width of each nail is narrower than that of one game ball, so that the game ball cannot pass. The game balls guided to the nail group T3 are prevented from flowing down below the second start port 640 by the nail group T2 (consisting of three nails), and all enter the second start port 640. It is configured.

  Here, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 640, it is set so that one prize ball is paid out to the player. Since 85% of the game balls launched into the right channel are configured to win the second starting port 640 (when the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state), the game balls launched by the player Of these, 85% are configured to be paid out as prize balls. Therefore, the player can suppress consumption (decrease) of the game ball as a holding ball by firing the game ball in the right channel as compared with launching the game ball in the left channel. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the right first start port 631 is configured not to win the second start port 640 by the nail group T2.

  Next, when the electric accessory 632 is in a special state (a state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are rotated until they are substantially horizontal), the left guiding member 632a flows down the left side of the first left start port 631. The flow path is configured to be closed. Thereby, when the electric accessory 632 is in a special state, it is configured such that a game ball that has flowed down the right channel is prevented from winning the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the number of times the first lottery game is executed with the first special symbol by increasing the number of winnings to the right first starting port 631 and decreasing the number of winnings to the second starting port 640. (Execution frequency) is increased. Furthermore, in the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, so that the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be reduced (lower).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state, since the variation time of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is set short, the game is performed so as to launch a game ball in the right channel, As already described, the percentage of game balls that win the second starting port 640 is set to 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel, so that the number of balls held by the player decreases. However, in this embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state is entered, the probability of winning a small hit with the second special symbol is set high. Further, the small hit game executed in the latent probability changing game state is set until the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65 reaches 3 seconds or 10 balls, and the opening time per round is set to other values. Since it is extended from the gaming state, a winning ball can be obtained with a small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of hitting during the latent probability change is set to be 15% consumed by flowing down the right channel, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the player's ball. Has been. Therefore, even in the latent probability changing game state, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease of the holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, it is prohibited to play a right-handed game (a game by launching a game ball into the right channel), and a game is placed in the second start port 640 in the normal gaming state. When the ball wins, an abnormal process is executed, and a warning display “Please play left-handed” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, in a normal gaming state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. Also good.

<Electric Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 88, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol And a variation type counter C3 used for selecting a variation pattern and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display unit 88), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45). It is updated periodically and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, in the RAM 203, the first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a and the second starting port 640 for storing respective counter values for winning for the left first starting port 63 and the right first starting port 631 are stored. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b in which each counter value is stored for winning is provided. In the present embodiment, the left first start port 63 and the right first start port 631 are provided with a maximum of four hold balls, and the second start port 640 is provided with a maximum of four hold balls, A total of up to eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, a game ball is played at the left first start port 631 or the right first start port 631 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game. When a ball wins, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins the second start port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is moved to a first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and various kinds of display for variably displaying the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Settings and control processing are executed.

  On the other hand, during a period when the special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is left on the first first start port 63. Alternatively, when winning the first start port 631 and the second start port 640 on the right, if the number of reserves for the winning start port is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value Acquired and stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start opening. In addition, when the number of reserves for the winning start opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and one prize ball (in this example, one game ball) is obtained. Only) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for the left first start port 63 and the right first start port 631, and four for the second start port 640. However, the number is not limited to four, and the upper limit may not be provided.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first per-random number counter C1 is acquired in common for each of the left first starting port 63 or the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is left first start port 63, right first start port 631, second start. At the timing of winning (start winning) in the mouth 640, it is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 b corresponding to the start opening in the RAM 203. The value of the random number that is a big hit is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. A jackpot is determined when the value matches a random jackpot value set by 202a (in this embodiment, “7” at low probability, “0-9” at high probability).

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hit values) that are jackpots is 1 when the probability is low, the value “7” is 10 when the probability is high, and the value “0-9” is It is stored in the first per random number table 202a.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type in the case of a big win. The first hit type counter C2 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in this embodiment). ), And then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the sphere is left first start port 63, right first start port 631, second At the timing of winning the start opening 640 (start winning), it is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning start opening. It should be noted that the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired is actually the timing at which a game ball is detected at the first start port switch (not shown) or the second start port switch (not shown). That is.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out of place. If there is, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, The stop type is that of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

  As described above, the jackpot type dedicated to the first special symbol, jackpot A, jackpot B and jackpot E are set as described above, and the jackpot type C and jackpot E are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the second special symbol. Has been. The jackpot A to the jackpot E are each composed of 15 rounds of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds at the start of the 13th round, and the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. When the game ball is detected by the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the big hit game is set to a probability change game state or a latent probability change game state in which the game state is a high probability state.

  On the other hand, in the case of big hit B and big hit E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 13th round. Since it takes 0.5 seconds or more for the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 to reach the probability change switch 65e3, if the jackpot B and jackpot E, the probability change switch 65e3 is set to the game ball. Is configured so that the game state after the jackpot is not set to a high-probability gaming state.

  Therefore, even if the jackpot game is started, since it is determined whether or not the probability change is given during the subsequent jackpot game, it is possible to keep expectation for the probability change for a long time. Furthermore, since the proportion of probability change given to the first special symbol is different from that of the second special symbol, the player can play a game by changing the expectation level where the probability change is given depending on the difference of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of tables, the jackpot type selection tables A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. FIG. This jackpot type selection table A is a selection table for determining the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot is in the normal gaming state (including the short-time gaming state). It is. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1), jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set. For jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set as a determination value, and for jackpot B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “34 to 99” is the determination value. Is set as As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), one type of jackpot C is set, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 99” is set as the determination value. That is, in the normal gaming state, when the jackpot in FIG. 1 is reached, jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34%, and jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%. On the other hand, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 100% when the jackpot in FIG.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot A is a state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the operating time of the electric accessory 632 is set longer. This is a big hit in which a V winning release pattern is set in which an opening pattern in which a game ball can be won is assigned to the probability changing switch 65e3 of the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot where no power support state is given and no V winning opening pattern is set. The jackpot C is set to the jackpot at which the electric support state is given and the V winning opening pattern is set.

  In this way, even in the normal gaming state, even if a big hit occurs in the second special symbol due to fraud etc. by setting only the big hit C as the big special type of the second special symbol that should not be played (changed) normally. In addition, it is configured so as to be able to suppress a problem that at least two jackpots are illegally granted in a high probability state without giving a latent probability changing game state.

  Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table B. The jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is established in the latent probability changing game state. In this jackpot type selection table B, jackpot A and jackpot E are set as jackpot types in special figure 1, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types in special figure 2, respectively.

  The jackpot E is a short jackpot at the time of 15 rounds, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change 100 times after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the jackpot probability is set to a low probability state. In addition, since the variation time of the special figure 1 is set to be long when shifting to the latent probability changing gaming state, it is generally the first special symbol variation that has shifted to the latent probability varying gaming state that is a big hit. Conceivable. In this case, there is an intention to rescue the player, and the jackpot E that is not selected in the normal gaming state is set to be selected instead of the jackpot B. Therefore, a player's discouragement can be suppressed and the malfunction which the motivation for a game falls remarkably can be suppressed.

  In the case of big hit in special figure 2, jackpot C and jackpot D are set respectively. The jackpot D is composed of a jackpot in which a latent probability change of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state is set, the probability that the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to the high probability state is set until at least two jackpot games are executed. . Therefore, for the player, the jackpot type is set such that the jackpot D is more advantageous than the jackpot C in which the probability variation gaming state is set.

  In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot C is set with “0 to 65” as a determination value, and the jackpot D is set with “66 to 99” as a determination value. Therefore, the jackpot C is set to be selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is won, and the jackpot D is selected with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player plays the game in the expectation that the jackpot D is selected when the big special symbol is a big hit in the latent probability changing gaming state.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used for determining the jackpot type when the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. In the jackpot type selection table C, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. The ratio at which the jackpot A is selected is set to 34% (determination value “0 to 33”), and the ratio at which the jackpot B is selected is set to 66% (determination value “34 to 99”). ).

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is set, the jackpot D is selected whenever the second special symbol is a jackpot, so that the latent probability variation gaming state is set and the player wins at least twice. The high probability state is configured to be easily set continuously until is executed. Here, in this embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and the electric accessory 632 is easily set to be in the special state (electric support). The number of balls entering the second starting port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, when the probability variation gaming state is entered, 3000 ms is selected at a rate of 191/199 for a normal symbol, and 30000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, the change time of 30000 ms having a long change time is selected with a low probability.

  Until this 30000 ms fluctuation time elapses, the electric accessory 632 is not operated in a special state, and during that time, it is easy for the game ball to win the second start port 640 (85 of the right-handed game ball). % Is a ball), so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased. On the other hand, during the probability variation game state, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the case of a deviation, the variation time of 1800000 ms is set as the variation time of the second special symbol. It is configured so that a new lottery is not efficiently executed even in a state where the holding ball is stored. However, the probability of hitting the first special symbol is set to 1/80 in the probability variation gaming state (see FIG. 15 (b)). The variation executed with the two special symbols is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the stored ball that is stored next is started. That is, by winning the small bonus with the first special symbol, the lottery opportunity with the second special symbol is increased, and it is set so that a lottery advantageous to the player can be easily executed. Therefore, the player can play a game in the hope of winning a small win with the first special symbol, and can increase the player's expectation in addition to the big win. Note that the small lottery probability may be set as an appropriate value as appropriate.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description of the various counters will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0.

  The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is the left first start port 63, the right first start port 631, or the second start port 640. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning a prize (start winning prize).

  In the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing of starting winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be acquired at the timing of starting the variation. Of course, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 may be selected at the start of fluctuation.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 (a) to 18 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in a low probability gaming state, and a latent probability variation game. Variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 18 (a)) for selecting a variation pattern in the state, Variation pattern selection table C (see FIG. 18 (b)) for selecting the variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state. ) Is set for each.

  In each variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern type is set corresponding to the number of reserved balls when the variation starts, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, and the determination result. Note that the type of variation pattern determined by the main control device 110 is a rough content of the variation pattern, and mainly the variation time and the variation type (non-reach and various reach) are determined. The voice lamp control device 114 is configured to determine more detailed contents of the variation pattern. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is out of the determination result, and an extremely long variation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. ing. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours are set. The business hours of the amusement store are generally long even from 9 am to 11 pm, so the business hours are 15 hours, and the time is longer than that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a big hit by playing with the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, a long variation time is set for a big hit. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer or the like that the game is being played with the second special symbol, the game store can perform illegal game monitoring and guidance with the correct game method.

  In the present embodiment, the winning time is also a long variation time in the second special symbol, but in the winning case, it may be configured with a short variation time such as 500 ms. By comprising in this way, the extremely long hit fluctuation | variation is performed by a 2nd special symbol, and the malfunction by which a hit | toe fluctuation | variation is not performed by a 1st special symbol during that period can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), in the latent probability changing game state, the variation time of the first special symbol when it is out of play is set to 180000 ms, and is set extremely long. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol that is a hit is composed of 500 ms and is set short. By configuring in this way, even when the first special symbol of the first change becomes a big hit E after shifting to the latent probability changing gaming state, it is difficult to understand that the transition to the latent probability changing gaming state. Furthermore, the jackpot game can be continuously executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (b), in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of deviation of the second special symbol is 180000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the hit variation time is set to 5000 ms, and is set in accordance with a period during which a treasure chest effect to be described later is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first and second special symbols are configured so that the variation display that is a big hit does not fluctuate at the same time. In the case of the configuration, the variation display time that is a big hit of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first special symbol The variation time that becomes the big hit of the symbol may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol that may determine the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, the second special in the meantime The jackpot C can be awarded to the player by winning the jackpot with a symbol. In this case, a configuration is conceivable in which, when a big win is started with one special symbol, the lottery game that is fluctuating with the other special symbol is invalidated. By configuring in this way, it is determined immediately after the jackpot C, which is a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player, and the probability variation gaming state is set, and the probability variation gaming state ends in a short period of time. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the above-described configuration in which the variable display with the success / failure determination result being the big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, the determination result of the first special symbol is a fluctuation that is out of place. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the variation time for the success / failure determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be displayed during the short-time game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed) can be reduced, and the number of lotteries with the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In addition, when the number of time reductions is until the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed 100 times, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 100 times continuously with the second special symbol coming off and changing. The number of times that the second special symbol is variably displayed during the short-time game can be effectively reduced by configuring the time longer than the time when variably displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description of the various counters will be continued. The first per-random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15C).

  When the first random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the sphere is changed to the first normal symbol start port 67a (through gate) or the second normal symbol start port 67b ( It is acquired when it is detected that the vehicle has passed through. The number of random numbers to be won is 5 in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5-9”. Further, in the high probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state, it is determined that the winning value is obtained when the value of the acquired first random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, and in the high probability gaming state, the acquired first random number counter C4 is acquired. When the value of the symbol is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the player has won the game, and the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88 as the stop symbol (second symbol). In the normal gaming state, the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are released once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment), and in the high probability gaming state, the predetermined time (in this embodiment) The opening operation of 1s) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

  When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable manner, and each counter based on the held ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. If no value is stored, a random number value is acquired from the first random number counter C4 in a normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the number of holdings corresponding to the random number value acquired from the first per-random number counter C4 (normal symbol holding 1 to 4). When a random number value is stored in each area, a normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON, and the normal symbol based on the random number value is stopped from being displayed, or 1 is obtained by digesting the hold. When data is shifted to the previous reserved area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area which is newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether the data is stored in the reserved area or whether the normal symbol is variably displayed is determined depending on which reserved area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display section 88 can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values. However, the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery game are selected. Set different counters for each game (second special symbol), and update them with different values by changing the update triggers and initial values of the various counters for the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Of course, the counter value may be configured.

  Thus, by configuring, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity, different counter values can be acquired. The fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the malfunction that the determination result of the success / failure is synchronized can be suppressed.

  In addition, even if a variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM or the like having a small storage area) can be achieved.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process at power-on (see FIG. 44). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. , Normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability variation valid flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, hour and middle counter 203t, big hit flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, pre-reading reserved ball storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, and other memory areas 203z Also it has the phrase.

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning at the first start port 64 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that game balls have won the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) are started. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the winning detection are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 631 during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is read from the counter buffer. Are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second start opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer in the same manner as the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start prize stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1), it corresponds to one start prize. The data is shifted to the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the first per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon detection of the start winning of the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is stored. This is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), The value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. A normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c includes four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag (not shown)) can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls in the order of passing through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (start winning prize) Are stored in order from the reserved area in the earlier order.

  In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Or, it is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect, the MPU 201 executes processes such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the first random number counter C4) stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored as the normal symbol holding. Shift to a ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning at the mouth 64 or the second starting port 640, the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed at the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Each counter counts up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 44, S1514). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that the game ball has won the left first starting port 63 or the right first starting port 631. When the counter value is stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the counter value stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), respectively. If stored, data stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is used as the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 23, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  Further, the change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a first normal symbol start port 67a or a second normal symbol start port 67b detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. On the first symbol display device 37 based on the passing of the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “start winning prize”) (the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed on the display device 88 up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 44, S1514). Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of the suspended balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 41).

  The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that the data of the first random number counter C4 is stored and being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. is there. When the value of the first random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number in which the reserved number is reduced and one reserved number is reduced), the value of the reserved area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set off, while the normal symbol flag (not shown) of the reserved area that is shifted and stored is set on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, a normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF.

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a probability change game state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the game state is a low probability game state (including a short-time game state). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON when the jackpot game ends (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on being set to ON. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  When the probability variation setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. May be configured to return to the officially set to ON. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the first variable winning opening 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. This probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1681 in FIG. 50). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1711 in FIG. 51). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, one is added and updated based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the first variable winning device 65 (FIG. 50). S1673). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharging number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are awarded to the first variable winning device 65. Is determined to match, the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, in the big hit A, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in the big hit B, the flow passage solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the big hit A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data for 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S1679 of the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, 1 is subtracted and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning to the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for discriminating the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention (in this embodiment, a voice “watching the liquid crystal”). In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 ball winnings in the first variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is decremented by one and updated by the processing of S1664 of the notification processing (FIG. 49, S1631) of the main controller 110. A notification command that is output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the notification counter 203m becoming zero. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  With this configuration, since the sound “Look at the liquid crystal” is output before the start of the 14th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, in the 13th round of the jackpot game, on the third symbol display device 81, a character of a girl is displayed, and a character of “attention” which is a notification that prompts the player to view the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is displayed. In the 14th round, since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, if the operation is watched by the player, the type of jackpot being executed is determined. In order for the player to continue to have an expectation that a probable game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game, the player makes the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6A) invisible. The notification effect is being executed. However, when the 13th round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is informed by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is performed. Thereby, after an interval effect is performed, a player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and a player's attention can be diverted from operation | movement of the switching member 65h.

  In this embodiment, it is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by informing the user to show the 3rd symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may alert | report so that the movement of the switching member 65h may be hidden by a player's hand by alert | reporting that the player's hand is held over the variable prize-winning apparatus 65. Moreover, not only the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 but you may comprise so that a player may be distracted by alert | reporting so that a decoration lamp 34 etc. may be seen to a player. Furthermore, it may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 13 rounds and informing the user to read it with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the effect that diverts attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 14th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem of determining whether the jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D or jackpot B, jackpot E is determined by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203o described later is added and updated by 1 (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for doing.

  The remaining ball timer 203o discharges the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 when one preset round ends and the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether the time necessary for the elapse of time. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance in the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203o has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings. (S1707 in FIG. 51). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that game balls are jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, illegally leaving the game ball in the first variable winning device 65, giving an impact at the start timing of the 14th round, causing the game ball to reach the switching member 65h earlier than actual, Even if it is a big hit E, it is possible to suppress the injustice to allow the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability variation | change game state is provided illegally.

  The probability variation valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) based on the flow passage solenoid 65k being ON is the probability variation switch 65e3. Indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203p described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. Thereafter, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the game ball is passed through the special discharge port 65e2 and passed through the probability change switch 65h, or played with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65h. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a sphere is pushed up and passed, or a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharge counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

  The short / medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols fluctuate in the short / short game state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. That is, in this embodiment, when the probability change gaming state is not set after the jackpot game, the game mode is shifted to the short-time gaming state 100 times.

  The big hit flag 203u is based on the winning of the left first starting port 63, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is a hit at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set to ON when it is determined. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised with the flag which can identify whether it is a jackpot corresponding to which symbol of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, “10” is set to the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol, and “01” is set to the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol, At “00”, the big hit flag 203u is set off.

  Here, since the jackpot flag 203u is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to ON at the start of the fluctuation. In this case, even if the other lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203u is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same way as a miss. Thereby, it can process so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously may not be performed with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol.

  In other words, when the variation display that is a big hit with either one of the special symbols is started, the variation display that is a big hit is not started on the other side, and only the out-of-change manner is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and independent jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. And you may comprise so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed. By adopting such a configuration, even if the variation display of the big hit B and the big hit E is started with the first special symbol during the probability variation gaming state, the variation time is set long, and the second special symbol is set. By configuring so that a lottery can be easily made in a short variation time, it is possible to easily configure a big hit with the second special symbol until the big hit B is started. Therefore, an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state is finished) is executed, and the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect for playing a game. Therefore, a fresh performance can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  The special figure 1 variation stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the jackpot game of the second special symbol starts to be executed while the first special symbol is variably displayed. In S1004 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the process of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204), it is set to OFF.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the process of S1011 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207), it is set to OFF.

  The pre-read hold storage area 203x stores determination information such as success / failure determination results, jackpot type, variation type, etc. for the hold balls stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. Storage area.

  The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. The small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display portion 88, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric accessory. A solenoid 209 made up of a solenoid for driving and the like is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange the displayed reserved symbol display in the order of the variable display start.

  A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the winning opening becomes an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222, at least a variation pattern selection table 222a is set.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. This variation pattern selection table 222a corresponds to a variation time indicated by a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, a rough variation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.), and a plurality of types of variation contents (for example, variation). One variation content is determined from reach variation patterns of different display contents having the same time and the same determination result.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f. , A special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, a special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, an effect counter 223j, a slave state setting area 223k, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Are stored with winning information. Based on the information stored in this winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can discriminate the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a fluctuating effect (variable) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). Display) and is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls for change display is added by entering the left first winning port 63 or the right first starting port 630, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol. When the change display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the first special symbol held after the storage. In order to notify the value of the ball counter 223b to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on a reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main controller 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the sub-status setting area 223h, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the current gaming status. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed-up gaming state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erasure switch (see FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) circuit 253 is pressed when the power is turned on (while turning on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122)). In this case, the RAM erase signal SG2 is output to the main controller 110 to clear the backup data. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is canceled, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after canceling the system reset via the bus line 240 and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, the left 7-segment LED of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment indicator 37b executes the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the right 7-segment LED is displayed. In the segment LED, a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) of the left first starting port 63, right first starting port 631, and second starting port 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is executed. A through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the sphere is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through-gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by predetermined control is performed. In this manner, control is performed so that the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can simultaneously perform variable display or stop display in a display manner indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) will be described in detail later, but the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has elapsed. The process of stopping the variable display in the process, and the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display when the second special symbol is variably stopped at the symbol showing the big win and the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed Is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in a variable display (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) will be described in detail later. If the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the processing for restarting the variable display is executed, while the temporary stop is performed. If not, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the hold data are executed. .

  After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable display (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described in detail later. Similar to the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the specified variation time of the second special symbol during variation display has elapsed. The process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game, and the variable display when the first special symbol is variablely stopped with the symbol indicating the jackpot and the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed A process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol being displayed is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in a variable display (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206) will be described in detail later. Similar to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), when the second special symbol variation is temporarily stopped. The process for resuming the variable display is executed. On the other hand, if it is not temporarily stopped, if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, A jackpot determination or variation pattern selection process based on the pending data is executed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303). . A process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 24, S305) will be described in detail later, based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set gaming state, the jackpot determination of whether or not the jackpot is executed.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which will be described in detail later, is a result of the success / failure determination based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability changing gaming state (probability changing) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation)) (S402: Yes), based on the random number table 202a per special symbol first for high probability, It is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (that is, the gaming state is the low probability gaming state (the probability variation is not in progress)) (S402: No), the special symbol first random number table 202a for the low probability is used. Based on (see FIG. 10B), it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

  It is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203u is on (S405). Here, when the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON, it indicates that a variation that becomes a jackpot is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the variation that becomes a big jackpot is not executed simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem in which jackpots are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the game store side becomes excessively large.

  In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is OFF, that is, when it is determined that the variation that becomes a big win is not started in the second special symbol (S405: No), the processing of S403 or S404 is performed. It is determined whether the executed lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S406: Yes), the jackpot flag 203u is set on for the first special symbol (S407). Thereafter, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 lottery result) is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type. (S409). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol is on (S405: Yes), or in the process of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out (S406). : No), special figure 1 deviation variation processing is executed (S410). The special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26, but setting of the off symbol when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out is executed.

  In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first random number C1 that is actually acquired is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u is already set on, that is, according to the second special symbol, When the big hit is started, the setting of forcible setting is forcibly executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the big win change is not executed at the same time, and the big win change is started in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress problems that cause excessive damage.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to perform the big hit variation at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute simultaneously. In this case, a special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, if the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, the fluctuation of one special symbol temporarily stops the measurement of the fluctuation time, It is conceivable to configure to temporarily stop.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special figure 1 fluctuation variation process (S410) which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 24, S203) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation variation process (FIG. 26, S410), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is on (S412: Yes), the first special symbol deviating symbol is set in the first special symbol display device 37 (S416). Thereafter, this process is terminated. As described above, when the small bonus is set for the second special symbol, the detachable symbol is forcibly set for the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that a variation that is a small hit is executed simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the process of S411, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the second special symbol (S411: No), whether or not the lottery result is a small hit is stored in the small hit random number table 202b. Based on the determination (S412). If it is determined that it is not a small hit (S412: No), the process of S416 is executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S412 that a small hit is made (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S414). A small hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), it is determined whether the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol in the process of S407.

  In the process of S501, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot has been set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (normal gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, probability varying gaming state, short-time gaming state) The variation pattern selection table 202e according to any one of the above is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state (S503). ). A variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 203e set in the process of S502 based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). Based on the selected variation pattern, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated (S505). Thereafter, the process of S507 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special figure 1 is out. A variation pattern selection process is executed (S506).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is on (S511: Yes), a small hit variation pattern is set (S512). In the case of small hits, one type of variation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Here, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3000 ms is set. A special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating a small hit is set (S513). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, out of place) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (see FIG. 16 (a) to (c)) is set (S514). Based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 from the set variation pattern selection table, a variation pattern is selected (S515). Based on the selected fluctuation pattern, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S516). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. After the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506) is executed, the process of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S507). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to ON (S601). Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to ON, in the second special symbol, it indicates that the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit is stopped and displayed. It shows that it is the timing to forcibly stop the fluctuation even before the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S601: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the first special symbol being changed is the end timing ( S602). If it is determined that it is not the time to end the variation of the first special symbol (S602: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation time (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (S603). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S603: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203203w is set to ON (S604). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of S604 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is on is set.

  A special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S605). The start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S606). Thereafter, the hour / middle counter 203t is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S607). Thereafter, the process of S609 is executed. In the process of S609, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S609). A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S610).

  On the other hand, in the process of S603, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is off for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (S603: No), the special figure 1 off stop process is executed (S608). ).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 30, this special figure 1 removal stop process (S608) is demonstrated. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 stoppage processing (S608). In the special figure 1 stop processing (S608), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). A special 2-variable stop command indicating ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is forcibly stopped) is set (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). Thereafter, the process of S627 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S621, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), whether the hour / medium counter 203t is greater than 0, that is, It is determined whether the game state is in progress (S625). If it is determined that the time is short (S625: Yes), the time-shortage counter is decremented by 1 and updated (S626). Thereafter, the process of S627 is executed.

  In the process of S627, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S627). A process of variably stopping the first special symbol that is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed. Thereafter, this process is executed. Here, returning to FIG. 29, after executing the special figure 1 stoppage process (S608), this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a variable manner at the same time, the second special symbol is used when the first special symbol is changed and stopped by the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON so as to execute the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, in the case where the second special symbol is to be changed and stopped based on the lottery result of the big win or the small win, the special figure 1 change stop flag 203v is set to ON so that the change of the first special symbol is stopped. It is forcibly executed. Thereby, the simultaneous change with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, when the first big symbol or the second special symbol has already begun to be a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly released as a result of the determination of whether or not it is missed. Fluctuation display is started. Therefore, it can suppress that big hit and small hit are forcibly performed continuously, and can suppress the malfunction in which euphoria becomes high too much.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the first special symbol retention ball number of each process from S301 to S306 with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) described above. The counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S305), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306). In each process from S701 to S706, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol reserved ball hit determination process (S705) Since the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) is the same except for the change, the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705), the first special symbol reservation ball execution area is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305) as compared to the process of S401. In the process of S801 (not shown), in the process of S408, in the process of S408, in the process of S808, in the process of S808, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) 2 (second special symbol) is the same as the processing of S409 and S410 except that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol in the processing of S809 and S810, respectively. Description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706), the special symbol 1 lottery result (first) is compared to the process of S501 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) described above. In the process in which the special symbol lottery result is S901, the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern command (first special symbol) is added to the special symbol 2 lottery result (second special symbol lottery result) for each process from S506 to S507. Is the same except that the process is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for each process of S906 to S907, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 36, S207), the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v of each process of S601 and S611 is compared with the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204) described above. Is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w in each process of S1001 and S1011. In the process of S602, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the end timing, but in the process of S1002, 2 It is determined whether the variation time of the special symbol is the end timing, and for each process from S603 to S610, S611 to S612, the special symbol 1 (first special symbol), the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203w. The special figure 2 variable stop command, the first special symbol jackpot start, and the special figure 1 confirmation command are S1003 to S1010 and S1011 to S1012. Special symbols), special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 1 fluctuation stop command, start of second special symbol jackpot, and special figure 2 confirmation command are the same except that they are changed. Is omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Can be made. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the lottery game is executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed at the same time, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, Since the change display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit stop display, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), it is determined whether the game ball has won any of the left first start port 63, the right first start port 630, or the second start port 640. Each counter value acquired up to the upper limit number of reserves (up to four each for the left first start port 63, the right first start port 630, and the second start port 640) is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second This is a process of storing in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or based on each counter value memorize | stored in each of the 2nd special symbol reservation ball | bowl storage area 203b, the process which predicts a determination result or the variation pattern etc. selected beforehand is performed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start winning) at the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 630, which is the first start port (S1101). . Here, winning to the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 630 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 630 (the start win has been received) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d Is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). This is determined as to whether the number of reserves for the left first start port 63 and the right first start port 630 is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the hold number is stored up to the upper limit value). . When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1104). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1105). Various counter values such as the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203a of the RAM 203 is obtained. Are each stored (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the number of held balls (S1106).

  Next, the first prefetch process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 39, but the determination result of the success / failure determination and the variation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Then, processing for determining the stop type and the like is executed.

  Next, for each process from S1108 to S1114, a game ball is awarded to the first start port (the left first start port 63 and the right first start port 630) executed in each process from S1101 to S1107. The only difference is that the process similar to the process performed on the second start port 640 is the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first look-ahead process (S1107) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch process (S1107).

  In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 39, S1107), first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the pre-read hold storage area 203x in the area with the smallest winning order (S1122).

  Based on the data stored in the read prefetch hold storage area 203x, the determination result is determined. In addition, the success / failure determination result determined here is determined in a case where it is a win in the normal gaming state. Since the variation time is varied and set depending on the number of holdings, the timing for starting the variation cannot be discriminated between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is not possible to determine the exact gaming state at the start of the variation. Therefore, it is only when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 having a common jackpot determination value is “7” in both the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state that the determination result can be accurately determined. Therefore, in the processing of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a win during the normal gaming state.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1123 that the result of the determination is a big win (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big win, and the first winning command indicating the jackpot type is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1123 that the result of the determination is wrong (S1123: No), a first winning command indicating that the prefetch lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place is set (S1125). . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a first start port (the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 630) and is newly stored on hold, the stored information is stored. Based on the above, the determination result is determined before the start of the fluctuation and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. It is possible to execute an effect that displays a notice symbol or the like and suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of prefetching, the determination of success / failure is determined as the normal gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the gaming state at the start of variation is accurately performed, and the determination of success / failure is executed based on the gaming state. You may comprise. In this case, the variation pattern selection is not varied according to the number of reserved balls as in this embodiment, but is configured to select a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. Discrimination becomes possible. When the prefetching is executed, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the change order until the change of the hold ball starts to change based on the stored information.

  Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second prefetch process (S1114).

  In the second prefetch process (FIG. 40, S1114), the first prefetch process (FIG. 39, S1107) described above is awarded to the first starting port (the left first starting port 63 or the right first starting port 630). This is a process for pre-reading the hold data based on it and making various determinations, whereas it is a process for making a variety of determinations by pre-reading the hold data based on winning in the second start port 640. Since the same processing is executed only in the difference, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the normal symbol variation process (S106) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1201). The normal symbol (second symbol) hitting includes the period from the time when the second symbol display unit 88 displays the winning symbol to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 632 being performed. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1201: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display unit 88 is in a variable display (S1202). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1222). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1220 and the processing of S1221, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S1222 (S1222: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1222 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S1222: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display unit 88 is set (S1223). . In the process of S1223, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the second symbol display section 88 displays the “○” symbol as a second symbol in a stopped display (lighted display). ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S1218, the “x” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display unit 88 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the processing of S1223, the variable display in the second symbol display unit 88 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set in the processing of S1213 and the processing of S1218. 2 Stop display (lighting display) on the symbol display section 88.

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1224). If it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1224: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1225). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is out of place (S1224: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the normal symbol is not in a variable display (S1202: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1204). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1205).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on in each area. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the first random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (that is, not 0) (S1208). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 0 (that is, not in time reduction) (S1208: No), the hit determination of the second per-random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) for low probability. Based on the value, the determination result is acquired (S1211). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203t is not 0 (that is, the hour is shorter) (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted ( S1209). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted (S1209: Yes), the processing of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1209: No), the hit determination value of the second per random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) for high probability. Based on the above, the determination result is obtained (S1210).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a win (that is, it is out of place) (S1212: No), the display mode of “x” that is the display mode at the time of losing is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of “O” that is the display mode of the win is It is set (S1213).

  It is determined whether the gaming state is in the short-time gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1214). When it is determined that the time-short game is not being played (S1214: No), the processing of S1217 is executed. When it is determined that the time-short game is being played (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1215). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted, the process of S1216 is executed.

  In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guide members (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b) of the electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1216). On the other hand, in the process of S1215, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (that is, the low probability gaming state) (S1215: Yes), the electric accessory 632 The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1217).

  It is determined whether the gaming state is in the short-time gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1219). If it is determined that the time is short (S1219: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is obtained as the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (fig. 19), the variation time is determined (S1220). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the usual fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined based on the value of the usual figure fluctuation type counter CS2 from the usual figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 19, in the usual figure variation pattern selection table 202f, a variation pattern of a normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state. Except for the probability variation gaming state (probability variation: with electric support), there is one variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal variation variation counter CS2. On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the change time of 3000 ms is determined by the determination value “0 to 190”, and the change time of 30000 ms is determined by the determination value “191 to 198”.

  Thereby, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time longer than the other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. When this long fluctuation time is selected, the electric accessory 632 is not operated until the fluctuation time elapses. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, when the second starting port 640 is disposed below the electric accessory 632 and the electric accessory 632 is activated, the left starting member 632 a can win the second starting port 640. The flow path is blocked. Therefore, in the meantime, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 640 is restricted.

  Here, as described above, when a variation time (30000 ms) having a long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so that the right-handed game during that time About 85% of the balls will win the second starting port 640. Therefore, by selecting a long variation time as the variation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation gaming state, the number of winnings at the second start port 640 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (c), during the probability variation gaming state, a jackpot D is always selected when winning in the second special symbol, and a jackpot that is more advantageous than a jackpot in the first special symbol is selected. Selected. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, the player who is drawn by the second special symbol can be advantageous to the player when it is a big hit rather than the lottery by the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give a period that is advantageous to the player by increasing the winning to the second start port 640 during the probability variation gaming state.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the first random number counter C4 when a game ball passes.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 42, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301). Here, it is detected over three timer interruption processes that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1303).

  The ball does not pass through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. However, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1303: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1303). : Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S1304). Then, the value of the first random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203f of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1305). In the processing of S1305, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 0, the normal symbol reservation 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal symbol hold 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal symbol hold 3 area, if the value is 3, the normal symbol hold 4 area first. The area.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1401), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1501). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1502). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1504). If it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505). (S1505: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown was not normally completed, the process proceeds to S1512 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. Therefore, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1512. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1512). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1513, S1514) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1510.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (S1507: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1510). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S1511). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (S1600) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). In the main process (S1600), roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is sent to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 ends, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). The probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when a big hit A or big hit C is executed, a game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). If it is determined that the game has entered, a process for setting data indicating that the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability-changing game state is set in the jackpot state setting area.

  When the probability variation setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 632 is executed. Thereafter, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

  Next, the display control process of the 2nd symbol (for example, symbol of "(circle)" or "x") by the 2nd symbol display part 88 is performed (S1258). Briefly, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display unit 88 displays the value. Then, the variation display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory 632 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251, and the processes after S1251 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1261, S1262).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1252 (S1262).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the first per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  In the process of S1256, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 40 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1263 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1259 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power supply interruption state, The process can be started from S1251. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1251 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S1301), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1251. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) or the start winning process (see FIG. 38) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 632 attached to the first right winning port 630 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the variation is determined according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) has ended. In the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 65), the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated. ) Is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1607). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the second symbol display device starts the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S1223 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S1212 or the processing of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 41). )

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1609). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1609: Yes), the process proceeds to S1601, and the processes after S1601 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1609: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1610, S1611).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1602 (S1611).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1608, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 43 has been executed, the power-off process after S1612 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1613). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1614), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1608 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1601 to S1607, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1601. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1601 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initialization processing (S1501) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1601. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1604). This jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a big jackpot or a small jackpot of a special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 29), the process of S1006 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36), or S624 of the special special figure deviation stop process (see FIG. 30). If the process of S1024 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see FIG. 37) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot or the jackpot is set, the special symbol jackpot or the jackpot is started. judge. In the process of S1621, when the big winning or the small winning of the special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), an opening command is set (S1622), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1621, if the special symbol big hit or small hit is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit or small hit is being made (S1623). During the special symbol jackpot or small jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) being displayed. , During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol jackpot game. If the special symbol jackpot is not being hit in the processing of S1623 (S1623: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the special symbol is big hit or small hit, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1625). The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 47, but the opening setting to the first variable winning device 65 and the probability variable solenoid in each round corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1641. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In this way, each operation of the first variable prize-winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle Such problems can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability changing solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 is set. The small hits consist of two rounds, and the open / close door 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1624 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (S1626). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1626 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the end timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball thrown time has elapsed. It is determined as When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: Yes), an ending process is executed (S1630). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the ending process (S1630) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1651). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1652). The probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1653). Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to be off based on the probability variation flag 203g being turned on. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is passing the probability variation switch 65e3, and to set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable gaming state until the big hit game ends. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1629, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), a notification process is executed (S1631). Here, the details of the notification process (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1631).

  In the notification process (S1631), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1631). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1631: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632). The determination of the end timing of the 13th round is performed when it is detected in the 13th round that 10 balls have been won or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1632 that it is not the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: No), this processing is ended. Here, by setting the 2-second counter in S1633, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the interval time, which is the ball throwing time after the 13th round is finished, and the sound of watching the liquid crystal is heard. Is output. Therefore, although the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, the player is attracted attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Thus, the player can be prevented from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed across the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), a notification command is set (S1666). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the sound output setting “Look at the liquid crystal”.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1631) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1632). Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the winning process (S1632) will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1632).

  In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S1671). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). When it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1671: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673). Thereafter, the process of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1672: No), the processing of S1674 is executed.

  In the process of S1674, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set (S1676). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). Thereafter, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to be on, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown away after the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1674 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the processing of S1678 is executed.

  In the processing of S1678, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1679). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passing switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1681). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682). Thereafter, the process of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1680, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the process of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1684). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1685). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1688). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1688: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to off (S1690). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1690). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the process of S1680 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the ball removal time. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1633). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality process (S1633) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality process (S1633). In the abnormal process (S1633), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 51, S1633), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1701). If it is outside the round valid period (S1701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1703). Thereafter, the process of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the processing of S1704 is executed.

  In the processing of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1705) because it is during the ball throwing time period. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the number of discharges (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the number of winning (value of the winning number counter 203j) match. Is determined (S1707).

  If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the processing of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). Thereafter, the process of S1709 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65 and the jackpot B.

  In the processing of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1710). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to initial values (S1711), and then this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 61, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S2116 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 53). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the information on the occurrence of power failure from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 53, S2113), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S2116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S2116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2116 is executed (see S2115 in FIG. 53). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If the time has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2110. Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S2101 is processing related to display (production) in S2102 to S2110, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111 and the variable display setting process of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S2111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2112. Details of this command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2112, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S2112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2116). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination processing (S2111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S2111) will be described below.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 54, S2111), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is executed (S2202). The special figure 1 variation start process (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the settings necessary for variably displaying the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 83. Is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S2202) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2241), and the fluctuation pattern type is determined from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Extract (S2242). The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command to notify the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the processing of S2242 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent probability changing gaming state (a gaming state without probability changing power support) (S2243). If it is determined that the gaming state is other than the latent probability changing gaming state (S2243: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the game is in the latent probability variation game state (S2243: Yes), is the variation of the first special symbol variation starting to fluctuate a variation that results in a big hit E (15R normal big hit: 100 electric support)? It is determined (S2244). When it is determined that the variation is not the big hit E (S2244: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation is a big hit E (S2244: Yes), a character indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A and 63B) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2245). ). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing gaming state is entered, in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous for the player is set to be short for the variation time. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the first special symbol that is mainly executing the game is set to be long. As a result, when the player shifts to the latent probability changing game state, the player turns right and plays a game so that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to start varying simultaneously. Here, in the latent probability variation game state, in the second special symbol, a high probability game (probability variation) is always given when a big win is obtained, but in the first special symbol, a normal probability game (low probability game) is obtained in the case of a big hit. There is a possibility of being awarded by lottery. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, even if the jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot: no electric support) is awarded in the first special symbol, and the jackpot E is the variation that starts with the first special symbol after the jackpot game Immediately, it will shift to the normal gaming state.

  As described above, normally, the third symbol display device is based on the start of the change to the big hit E in the first special symbol after the transition to the latent probability changing game state in which the game is mainly played in the second special symbol. In 81, a chance zone (notification mode indicating a short-time gaming state or a probable gaming state) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the player displays the heaven zone (notification mode indicating that the game is in the latent probability changing game state) on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the player receives two big hit games. Until it is executed, it recognizes that a high probability state (probability change) is maintained (highly likely). However, in the chance zone, the player is not sure that the probability change gaming state will be awarded even after the next jackpot, and recognizes that it may be in the short-time gaming state (low probability state). While playing games.

  Thus, for example, when the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state and the first variation of the first special symbol is a variation that becomes a big hit E, the heaven zone is displayed normally, but the chance zone is displayed. It will be. Thereby, the malfunction which a player becomes discouraged within a short time can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the special chart 1 variation start process (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command ( S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. This is used when setting the second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  When the process of S2302 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability change gaming state (a gaming state with probability transformation support) (S2203). If the gaming state is other than the probability variation gaming state (S2303: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the determination result of the second special symbol starting to fluctuate is a big hit (S2304). Here, the discrimination is executed by discriminating whether the variation pattern is a big hit from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command.

  In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big win (S2304: Yes), a notice effect command per treasure box is set for the display control device 114 (S2305). . On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong, a treasure chest removal notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2306).

  Here, the notice effect command per treasure box is a command for instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, when a transition is made to the probability-changing gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. In the display area Dn, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn is a treasure box symbol, and the display mode shown in FIG. 9A and the display mode shown in FIG. Are repeatedly displayed in a short period (for example, every 0.5 seconds), and can be displayed as blinking.

  Here, when the probability variation gaming state is set, if the result of determining whether the second special symbol is right or wrong is out, the long deviation variation pattern C (1800000 ms) is selected. Therefore, the frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started is extremely reduced. However, if you win a small win with the first special symbol, based on the stoppage of the change, the change of the second special symbol that is changing is also forcibly stopped and is newly stored after the small hit game The change for the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started. In this case, the player expects that the variation that becomes a big hit in the second special symbol that is more advantageous than the first special symbol is easily started.

  When the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the first display area Dm is reduced and the treasure box is enlarged and enlarged in the empty display area. Is displayed. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode that vibrates for about 2 seconds, when the treasure box is opened and the determination result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and it is informed that the second special symbol is a big hit. And the alerting | reporting aspect which shows changing to the latent probability change game state of "Heaven zone entry determination!" Is displayed. Also, a notification mode for instructing to stop the launch of the game ball “Stop firing!” Is also displayed.

  Here, instructing to stop the launch is that the game is mainly executed with the first special symbol in the probability variation game state, but the game is mainly performed with the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state. Therefore, when a game ball enters the right first start opening 630 and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is stored, it is a chance that a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed. The failure can be suppressed by instructing to stop the launch.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong, as shown in FIG. 10A, the display for opening the treasure box is executed in the same manner as the case where the result of determination of success / failure is a big win. The word “sorry” indicating that the determination result is out of place is displayed. After that, when 5 seconds have passed after the start of fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, and blinking is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol has elapsed. Is done.

  Thereby, even if the player has a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of the change of the second special symbol, and thereafter Can focus on the variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game is easy to understand, and the player can play the game with good feeling.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), stop type command reception processing is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2311). The stop type (big hit A to big hit E, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable.

  It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a normal gaming state (S2313). If the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether the stop type is a big hit A (15R probability variation big hit: no electric support) (S2314). If it is determined that the stop type is other than jackpot A (S2314: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type is jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the first special symbol (special diagram 1) hold 1 (the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a in the fastest digestion order area) ) Is determined as to whether or not the result of determining whether or not the holding ball is a big hit E (15 rounds, normal big hit: 100 times of electric support) (S2315). Here, the jackpot random number value of the corresponding reserved ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b and determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a first hit random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) and a jackpot type selection table 202d (FIG. 15) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. 16 (a) to (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main controller 110, It is configured such that the sound lamp control device 113 can determine whether or not the result is correct in the probability variation state.

  In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the “chance zone entry” character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot game is ending. A display command to be instructed is set to the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not the big hit E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the character “entering the heaven zone! Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the latent probability changing game state, the probability changing game is easily set continuously until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that at least two jackpots have been committed when the characters of the heaven zone are displayed. In addition, since it is configured to be displayed at the end of the jackpot game, the player can play the game until the end of the jackpot game, expecting the transition to the latent probability change game state, and can improve the fun of the game .

  In addition, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state, if it is determined that the jackpot E wins in the latent probability change game state in the first special symbol hold 1, in the jackpot A ending, the short-time game state or the probability change game state “Chance zone entry !!” is displayed to indicate that the player is not aware that the jackpot game has been confirmed to occur at least twice, and in the short-time game state or the probable game state Recognize that there is a game. Therefore, the player can hardly recognize that the game has shifted to the latent probability changing game state, and the discouragement of shifting to the time-saving game state in a short time can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2305: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2207). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the second special symbol reserved ball included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter e (that is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is an audio lamp The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the control device 113 is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S2208).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball wins (start winning) the left first start port 63, the right first start port 630 or the second start port 640. Therefore, every time there is a start winning, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol of the main controller 110 by the process of S2207. It can be adjusted to the values of the symbol holding ball counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when a start winning is detected. Then, it can be set to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), winning command processing is executed (S2210). Details of the winning command process (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command process (S2210). In the winning command process (S2210), first, the received winning command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be identified, and the reservation order (the number of held balls) and the determination result in the normal gaming state can be determined. Yes. Furthermore, the counter value obtained at the time of starting winning is composed of commands that can also be discriminated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (S2402). In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the low probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability change is not in progress) (S2402: Yes), whether or not there is information on the probability change jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223. Is determined (S2403). In the process of S2403, if it is determined that there is no probability variation jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the process of S2403 and S2404 is not executed, and the process directly proceeds to S2405. On the contrary, when it is determined that there is information on the probability variation jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: Yes), a notification lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2405. The notification lottery process in S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of S2405, other processes are executed (S2405), and the winning command process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the notification lottery process (S2404) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is a determination value (S2502). In the processing of S2502, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (counter in the range of 0 to 198) is a determination value (in this embodiment, “0 to 50”) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command is displayed on the display control device 114 for displaying the characters “Please stop firing!” To inform the symbol display device 81 to stop the launch of the game ball (S2503). The process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when winning information that is a promising big hit, that is, a big hit A is received in the normal gaming state, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the player to stop firing. Here, when shifting from the normal gaming state to the latent probability changing gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, and the game with the second special symbol becomes the main gaming method. However, when the big hit A is won in the normal gaming state, if a holding ball for the first special symbol is stored, a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player is executed in the first special symbol even during the latent probability changing gaming state. It will be. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the hold to win the jackpot A is stored in the normal gaming state, a notification to stop the launch of the game ball is executed by lottery, so the player can play the game ball at an early timing. Firing can be stopped and winning to the left first starting port 63 can be suppressed. In addition, the player can recognize early that the jackpot is A by being notified of the stop of the launch, and can diversify the effects of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch stop notification is executed by lottery. However, when the big hit A holding ball is stored, it may be configured to be notified.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the winning command process (FIG. 58, S2210) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that no winning command has been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that a status command is received (S2211: Yes), status command reception processing (S2212) is executed. Details of the status command reception process (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the state command reception process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the status command reception process (S2212).

  In the state command reception process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed based on the state command received from the main controller 110 (S2601). Whether the gaming state has been changed is determined by comparing the gaming state information set in the sub-status setting area 223k with the received gaming state. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state (that is, the time saving gaming state) (S2602). When it is determined that the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state (that is, the short-time gaming state) (S2602: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the normal gaming state is set (S2603). Here, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (“Ox” in the present embodiment) is displayed in the second display region Dn. Thus, a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display characters of “lower bound zone” indicating the normal gaming state is set to the display control device 114 (S2604). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S602 that the gaming state has been changed to a state other than the normal gaming state (S2602: No), the gaming state has been changed to a latent probability changing gaming state (a gaming state without a probability changing power support). A determination is made (S2605). In the process of S2605, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state (S2605: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the latent probability changing gaming state is set (S2606). Here, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display region Dn (“Ox” in this embodiment). Thus, a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set. In the first special symbol hold 1, it is determined from the winning information storage area 223 b whether hold information for determining the jackpot E is stored (S 2607). When the hold information in which the hold 1 in the special figure 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the characters indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62B) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display command to be set is set (S2608). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a jackpot E (S2607: Yes), a display command for displaying characters indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). . Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2605 that the game state has shifted to a gaming state other than the latent probability changing gaming state (ie, the probability changing gaming state) (S2605: No), the probability changing gaming state (the gaming state with probability changing support) is set. A corresponding main display area setting command is set to the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the second display region Dn (the treasure chest symbol in this embodiment (FIG. 9A)). (See (b))), a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set.

  A display command for displaying the chance zone characters on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. In the process of S2612, the state of the gaming state indicated by the received state command is set in the slave state setting area 223k (S2612). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Meanwhile, returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the status command reception process (S2212), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a status command has not been received (S2211: No), processing according to another command is executed (S2219).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2112). This variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2705 is performed. Migrate to On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

  Next, in the process of S2703, the change pattern in the change display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 change pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Obtained from 223z, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is generated (S2703). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). When the display is set), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decreased by 1 (S2704).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is not on (that is, off) (S2705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2302 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2205), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Thus, a display variation pattern command for the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the second special symbol). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is reduced by 1 (S2708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set to ON (that is, is OFF) (S2709: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. If the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set off, and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set off (S2710). ).

  In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 is given a stop type (either 15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit) based on the stop type. A display special figure 1 stop type command for notification is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 determines whether the stop type (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit) ) Is displayed (S2712). Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the judgment result is out of place. Is done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

  With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are variably displayed simultaneously. Can do.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the player can play a game by switching a special symbol that sets a long-time variation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the transition of the gaming state. It was configured to control possible special symbols. In the latent probability changing state, only the jackpot that becomes the probability changing gaming state is set to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the jackpot, so the probability changing gaming state is set again after the jackpot is executed. Is done. Therefore, for the player, when entering the latent probability changing game state, it is usually possible to set the probability changing state until the jackpot is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that the jackpot is guaranteed twice when entering the latent probability changing gaming state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is configured that 85% of the right-handed game balls win the second start opening 640 in a state where the electric accessory 632 does not operate. Furthermore, in the latent probability change game state, it is set to win a small hit with the second special symbol, the lottery probability is about 14% of the right-handed game balls to the player as a winning ball in the small hit game It is set with the probability of being paid out. Therefore, when the operating frequency of the electric accessory 632 is set to be low (non-electric support state), even in the latent probability changing game, the game is performed in a state in which the decrease in the player's ball is suppressed when a right-handed game is played. be able to.

  Furthermore, the game is set so that the game shifts from the latent probability change game state to the probability change game state whenever a big hit is made with the second special symbol. Here, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is increased and the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened. And, if a big hit with the first special symbol, a big hit that shifts to either the latent probability changing gaming state or the normal gaming state is given by lottery, so can the player get two big hits again? You can play games with the expectation of Moreover, it can suppress that gambling nature becomes high by making it transfer to a normal game state.

  Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, when the big hit is made in the first special symbol that mainly plays the game, the lottery ratio of the big hit A to which the latent probability changing game state is given is set lower than the lottery ratio of the big hit B. It is possible to increase the difficulty of shifting to the probable gaming state and suppress the increase in gambling.

  In the present embodiment, the game state is configured to be switched when a jackpot game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state can be switched according to the type of the jackpot even when a bonus game is won. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the gaming state is switched by configuring the small win more easily than the big win. Therefore, even when the gaming state is set to be disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to switch to a gaming state that is more advantageous by winning a small hit, and the player can be expected to win a small hit. In addition, even when an advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible to switch to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, and gambling can be suppressed.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group> (2-loop configuration)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. In a gaming machine having at least a first award game and a second award game that is different from the first award game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. In the state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second privilege state is set after execution of the second privilege game, and the first privilege game is executed when the second privilege state is set and the first privilege game is executed. The first advantageous state is set after the game is executed. Gaming machine A1, wherein is.

  At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, at least a first bonus game that gives a bonus advantageous to the player and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game are executed by the bonus game executing means. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the second privilege game is executed. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. Thereby, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that a state advantageous to the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of bonus games are executed, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is the first advantageous state. When a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state can be set, and the third privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the specific state is set after the third privilege game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The state setting means sets a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the third privilege game is executed. Thereby, in the second advantageous state, the specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuing state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling nature of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, so that the advantage given to the player is excessive. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is improved by the privilege game executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can expect the privilege game to be executed.

  In either the gaming machine A1 or A4, a start condition determining means capable of determining whether a first start condition and a second start condition different from the first start condition are established, and the start condition determining means And a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the special game executing means is configured to perform a specific lottery by the lottery means. A gaming machine A5, which executes the privilege game based on the determination that the result is established.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine A1 or A4, the following effects are produced. That is, the start condition determining means determines whether the first start condition and the second start condition different from the first start condition are satisfied. A lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the fact that the start condition determining means determines that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that a specific lottery result has been established, the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. This makes it possible for the player to expect the first start condition and the second start condition to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the gaming machine A5 has a regulation means for regulating establishment of the second start condition.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the establishment of the second start condition is regulated by the regulating means, so that the player There is an effect that a disadvantageous state can be easily set.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, a first identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the first start condition and a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the second start condition. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying each of the two identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information simultaneously. A gaming machine A6 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second start condition are respectively displayed by the dynamic display means. Dynamically displayed on the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed simultaneously by the dynamic display means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the gaming machine A7 has release means for releasing the restriction by the restriction means based on the specific advantageous state being set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the restriction by the regulating means is released by the releasing means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation that a specific advantageous state is set.

  A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, and an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. And a control means for facilitating setting of the advantageous state by the setting means when the privilege game is executed next based on the advantageous state being set by the setting means. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine A8, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the control means by the setting means when the advantageous game is executed next time. It is possible to set it continuously. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch between advantageous and unfavorable and prevent unfavorable side)
The first lottery game is performed based on the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entrance into the first entrance. And a lottery game executing means for executing a second lottery game based on having entered the second entrance, and the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game. A switching means for switching between one state and a second state in which the second lottery game is advantageous over the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity, and a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means A gaming machine B1 having suppression means for suppressing execution of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game executing means on the basis of having entered the first entrance. Further, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game executing means based on the fact that the player has entered a second entrance different from the first entrance. Switching between a first state in which the second lottery game is disadvantageous to the player over the first lottery game and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity It is done. Execution of a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means is suppressed by the suppression means. As a result, the disadvantageous lottery game is prevented from being executed by the suppression means, so that the player can easily execute the advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that causes a significant disadvantage to the player.

  In the gaming machine B1, first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means, and second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means, and dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The dynamic period determining means has a longer dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a lottery game switched adversely by the switching means than a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a lottery game switched advantageously. A gaming machine B2 that makes it easy to determine a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Further, the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is respectively determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is advantageously switched to the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is disadvantageously switched by the switching means is determined dynamically. It is easy to determine by means. Thereby, it can suppress that the game switched disadvantageously is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can discriminate a game that is advantageously set.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, it has a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the firing force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player, The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where a game ball launched from the launching unit can enter when the player performs the same operation on the adjusting unit. A gaming machine B3, which is characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means. The launching force of the game ball fired by the launching means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the player's operation. The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where game balls launched from the launching unit can enter when the player performs the same operation on the adjusting unit. Thereby, the player can execute a lottery game advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player, The privilege granting means is set such that a privilege grant ratio that is advantageous to a player is set higher when the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game. A gaming machine B4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, a privilege is given to the player by the privilege granting means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game as compared to the first lottery game, a privilege grant ratio that is advantageous to the player is set higher. Thereby, when the game in the second lottery game is set to be advantageous for the player, a more advantageous state can be set for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the privilege granting means is either the first privilege or the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that one of them is given and the switching means switches to the second state on the basis of the provision of the second privilege by the privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, as the privilege, either the first privilege or the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Based on the provision of the second privilege by the privilege granting means, the switching means switches to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the first lottery game or the second lottery game is the bonus given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting unit until a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that a ratio at which a set privilege set so as to easily become a specific lottery result is set higher than a privilege for the first lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or until the specific condition is satisfied. Since the ratio at which the set privilege is set such that the second lottery game is likely to become the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game, the second lottery game is executed. This has the effect of improving the player's expectations.

  In the gaming machine B6, the gaming machine is configured such that at least the set bonus is given to the bonus given to the second lottery game by the bonus granting means. B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, at least the set privilege is provided to the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second lottery game is executed can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a first flow path through which game balls can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entrance opening are connected to the first flow path. A gaming machine B8, which is arranged in each of the second flow paths, and the second entrance is arranged in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively, Since it is arrange | positioned at 2 flow paths, there exists an effect that the state which performs only a 1st lottery game can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the suppression unit notifies information indicating that the disadvantageous lottery game is being executed. A gaming machine B9 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the restraining means confirms that a disadvantageous lottery game is executed when a lottery game disadvantageous to the player is executed. Since the notification information shown is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the lottery game executing means is configured to be capable of executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are executed simultaneously by the lottery game executing means, so that the game can be performed efficiently. There is an effect that can be done.

<Feature C group> (Electric Chu configuration)
The first lottery is executed based on the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entrance into the first entrance. And a lottery means for executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on the game ball having entered the second entrance, and the first entrance to the first entrance Variable means that can be varied between a first state that restricts entry and a second state that makes entry easier than the first state, determination means that executes determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and determination And a variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state when a specific determination result is determined by the means, and based on establishment of a predetermined condition, And a restricting means for restricting entry or restricting execution of the second lottery. Tricks machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means on the basis of having entered the first entrance. Further, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The variable means changes between a first state that restricts entry into the first entry port and a second state that makes entry easier than the first state. The variable means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control means when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the restriction means restricts the entrance to the second entrance and the execution of the second lottery. Thereby, a state advantageous to a player and a disadvantageous state can be set by the regulating means. Therefore, there is an effect that a change in interest can be given to the player and the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance, and the variable means enters the second entrance by the variable means when the variable means is in the second state. It is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down the flow path of the ball, and the restricting means sets the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, whereby the second incoming ball A gaming machine C2 that restricts entry into the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is disposed so as to prevent the game ball flowing down the flow path entering the second entrance by the variable means. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the entry into the second entrance is restricted by the restriction means. Thereby, the entrance to the 2nd entrance can be controlled with easy composition. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the game machine C1 or C2 includes a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entrance is defined by the first flow path. And the second flow path, and the variable means is disposed at the first entrance opening disposed in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. Since the variable means is arranged at the first entrance opening arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that it is possible to easily configure the game ball flowing down the second flow path into the first entrance opening.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery, and the dynamic display thereof Dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the means, and the restricting means The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that execution of the second lottery is restricted by making it easy to determine a long dynamic display period as a target display period by the dynamic display period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. By making the dynamic display period long as the dynamic display period for the second identification information easy to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the execution of the second lottery is restricted by the restricting means. Therefore, there is an effect that execution can be restricted to the second lottery with an easy configuration.

<Feature D group> (Continuously up configuration)
Based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance, A lottery means for executing a second lottery that is advantageous to the player over the first lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result on the display means and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery on the display means; Dynamic display period determining means for respectively determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display determining means A dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period. Setting means capable of setting a state and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined, and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped in a specific stop display mode When displayed, as a privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and a privilege given to the player by the privilege granting means, the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery A privilege determining means for determining at least one of the first privilege and the second privilege that is less granted than the first privilege, and either the first identification information or the second identification information. When one is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode. Stop display And when the long state is set by the setting means, the setting means for easily determining the second privilege by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Game machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the game ball having entered the first entrance. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determination means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state The short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery as the privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege that is less privileged than the first privilege are given. Either one is determined by the privilege determining means. When either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to a specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from that is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second benefit is easily set by the setting means by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Thereby, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The gaming machine D1 has gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states based on a predetermined condition, and the setting means has a specific gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. On the condition, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On the condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second benefit is easily determined by the setting means by the privilege determination means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect more to determine the second privilege when a specific gaming state is set.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, a setting unit that sets an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege granting unit, and the advantageous state is set by the setting unit. Based on this, the gaming machine D3 includes a control unit that makes it easy to set the advantageous state by the setting unit even when the privilege is given next.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege granting means, an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege granting means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state is easily set by the setting means even when the privilege is next given by the control means. It is easy to set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, and D1 to D3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, and the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3 The gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
63 Left first starting port (part of first entrance)
630 Right first start port (part of first entrance)
S104 Switching means S106 Suppression means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies a lottery of a game when a game ball enters a start opening provided on a game board surface and notifies the lottery result. Executed in If the lottery result is a win, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined to win is high after a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed is also provided at the starting point. It is executed based on the game ball being entered. When it is set to the high probability gaming state, if it is decided to shift to the normal probability gaming state in the case of winning in the high probability gaming state, a configuration to shift to the normal probability gaming is proposed. ing.

JP 2005-319221 A

  By the way, in the above configuration, there is no sharpness in the game, and further improvement of the interest of the game has been demanded.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game in the above gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and the first entrance means. based on the game ball has entered the special sphere means executes a first lottery, based on the game ball has ball entrance to the second ball entrance means, advantageous to the player than the first lottery comprising a selecting means capable of performing a second drawing, dynamic display on the display unit of the first identification information for indicating the lottery result of the first drawing, to indicate the lottery result of the second lottery Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means respectively, and a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means a dynamic display period determining means for determining respectively, before Symbol first identification information or the second identification information is a specific As a privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege that is advantageous to the player when stopped and displayed in the stop display mode, and as a privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means, the first lottery or the first based on 2 lottery lottery result has a privilege determining means for determining either the at least a first award and a second award benefits less applied than the first offer, the, the first identification information Alternatively, when either one of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to the specific stop display mode. Has a stop display means for stopping and displaying in a different stop display mode, and a setting means capable of setting a first state and a second state different from the first state, the dynamic display period determining means, The first state is set If the first state is set to a long dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period that is most likely to be determined as the dynamic display period of the first identification information, the movement of the second identification information A dynamic display period that is easy to determine as a dynamic display period, and that is shorter than the dynamic display period that has the highest probability of being determined as the dynamic display period of the first identification information when the second state is set. the second state is determined to facilitate construction as a dynamic display period of the second identification information when it is set, the gaming machine, when the first state is set by the setting unit, wherein those having a means for easily determined second benefits by the privilege determining means by the first drawing than if the second state is set.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball , the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the game ball in the first ball entry means. The first lottery is executed based on the fact that the player has entered the ball, and the second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means. A lottery means that can be executed, and first identification information for indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means, and second identification information for indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is displayed. Dynamic display means capable of dynamic display on the display means, and dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means, respectively. The display period determining means and the first identification information or the second identification information are stopped in a specific stop display mode. A bonus granting means that gives a player a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and a bonus given to the player by the bonus granting means, as a result of the first lottery or the second lottery And a privilege determination means for determining at least one of the first privilege and the second privilege that is less granted than the first privilege, and the first identification information or the second identification When either one of the information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is different from the specific stop display mode. Stop display means for stopping display, and setting means capable of setting the first state and a second state different from the first state, and the dynamic display period determining means includes the first state If set, the first knowledge When the first state is set, a long dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period having the highest probability of being determined as the dynamic display period of information is determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information. When the second state is set, the second state sets a dynamic display period that is shorter than the dynamic display period that has the highest probability of being determined as the dynamic display period of the first identification information. The game machine is configured to be easily determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the gaming machine is set with the second state when the first state is set by the setting means. Means for making it easier for the privilege determination means to determine the second privilege than in the first lottery .

I I, there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus of a La-La cross section, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a top view of a 1st variable winning apparatus. (A)-(b) is a partial rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the transition of the game state in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the frame button in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the selection switch in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, a special symbol reservation ball storage area, a special symbol reservation ball execution area, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area, and a normal symbol reservation ball execution area. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, c) is a diagram schematically showing a second per-random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the common figure fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 1st Embodiment, (b) is MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 removal stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the notification lottery process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 (see FIG. 11A) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11B) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol display (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), the selection switch 600 is a decision switch (a) for determining the selection of effects, the left switch 600b for instructing selection in the left direction, and for instructing selection in the upward direction. The upper switch 600c includes a right switch 600d for instructing selection in the right direction and a lower switch 600e for instructing selection in the lower direction.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first start port 63 a, 2 The start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The left first start port 630, the right first start port 631, the second start port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a first normal symbol start port 67a and a second normal symbol start port 67b are provided below the first normal symbol start port 67b. The first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b are configured in the same shape, and are configured as a start port having a gate-type sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. Yes. When a game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “O” and “X” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67 or the second normal symbol start port 67b while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display section 88, the number of passages is the same as the first normal symbol start port 67a. A total of four times is held at the second normal symbol start port 67b, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display device 37.

  When it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display section 88 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 632 is activated. The ordinary electric accessory 632 includes a left guiding member 632a and a right guiding member 632b, and is usually spaced by an interval through which one game ball can pass left and right through the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b. Time is maintained in an upright position. The left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in the present embodiment) from the state where the left guide member 632a stands substantially vertically, and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member are moved to the first position. By guiding to the 2 start opening 640, it will be in the state (special state) where a game ball is easy to enter in the 2nd start opening 640. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display section 88. At this time, the normal electric accessory 632 is not actuated, and the next normal symbol (second symbol) change is executed.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a were awarded to the left first start port 630, the right start port 631, the second start port 640, the first normal symbol start port (through gate) 67a, and the second normal symbol start port (through gate) 67b. The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) for which variation display is not executed among the spheres, is indicated by a lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (7 segments in the present embodiment) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time), which is determined based on winning in the left first start port 630 or the right second start port 631. After the center segment of FIG. 3 is blinked), the display is stopped with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed.

  A second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game (dynamic display) is displayed on the right 7-segment LED. Specifically, it is displayed until the variation time determined based on the winning at the second starting port 640 elapses, and is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  Moreover, although the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) is also applicable.

  In this pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for winning to the left first start port 63, the right second start port 631, and the second start port 640, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (big win lottery). The jackpot type is also determined. The jackpot type determined here is the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1): jackpot A (15R jackpot probable jackpot), jackpot B (15R regular jackpot), jackpot E (15R regular jackpot (electric support) Yes)) is set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of electric support for the big hit E indicates that the ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to a special state. In jackpot E, after 15 rounds of jackpot game, the electric support state is set until the total number of first lottery games and second lottery games reaches 100.

  As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot (without electric support)) are set (FIG. 16). (See (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged as a winning device that is operated in an open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 is operated so that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened 15 times for a predetermined period or until a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls enter for the jackpots A to E. Is done.

  The configuration of the first variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the first variable prize winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65 b that is arranged to project from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65 b, so that the first variable A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and a LED disposed on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an open / close for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, a back cover body 65e, and a flow path A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the bar body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and a back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. A back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side, and is attached to the back cover body 65j with screws. It is comprised with the cover body 65m for fixation for fixing.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in an inaccessible state. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the right first winning port 631 side. It is configured to be induced. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning port 640 while keeping the right-handed state even during the short-time game (including during the probability change game), and to the left-handed immediately after the big hit game The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Fig.5 (a) is La-La sectional drawing shown in FIG.5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and is guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special outlet 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special outlet 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state (probability change) by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the first variable winning slot 65 during the jackpot game, the player's interest is improved even during the jackpot game. Can do. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the shortest. . The operation of the switching member 65h is set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the 13th round. Has been. Further, when the big hit B and the big win E are won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the 13th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, it is configured that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is impossible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that an excessive advantage or disadvantage does not occur.

  With reference to FIG. 6B, the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem of winning in the probability change switch 65e3 even if the winning ball is B in the thirteenth round in a state where the game balls won before the 13th round are not discharged.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific prize opening 65a in the first variable prize winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, for one ball prize). 15 prize balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, various gaming states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flow in which various game states are set. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (when the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal gaming state is set. In this case, the variation time of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is set to be long. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17, it is configured that 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the variation time of the special figure 2 in both cases where the result of the determination of success / failure is hit and out. Mainly, the business hours of the amusement shop are about 15 hours from 9:00 am to night 11 and are set longer than that. Therefore, even if a game (right-handed game) is performed by passing the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the normal game state, the fluctuation in the special figure 2 does not end within business hours. In the normal gaming state, the electric accessory 632 is also difficult to be set to the special state. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible for the player to play the right-handed game on the left side of the variable display unit 80. It is set so as to be disadvantageous compared with passing a game (left-handed game).

  If a left-handed game is played in the normal gaming state, if the first lottery game of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, either the big hit A (15R probability variable big hit) or the big hit B (15R normal big hit) Selected. Here, in the case of jackpot B, after the jackpot game of jackpot B is executed, the normal gaming state is set. On the other hand, in the case of jackpot game A, a game state without probability change power support (latency probability change) is set. In the game state without probability transformation sub-support, the jackpot probability is set 10 times higher than the normal game state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 s). Therefore, the player can efficiently perform the second lottery game in which a lottery is performed using the second special symbol even if the player makes a right-handed game.

  Here, in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state, it is configured so that the probability variation jackpot (jackpot A) is selected at a rate of 34% when it is a jackpot, but in the second special symbol, The probability variation jackpot (jackpot C or jackpot D) is selected at a rate of 100%. Therefore, the player who is drawn by the second special symbol is configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In the game state without the promiscuous power support, if the variation time of the first special symbol is out of place, it is set to 1800000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18A). On the other hand, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms regardless of the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery of a maximum of 3600 times in the second special symbol while the first special symbol is deviated once. Since the probability of jackpot during probability change is 1/40, it is configured so that if it is a normal game, the second special symbol can be a big hit before the first special symbol that has been missed changes once. ing.

  In the game state without probability transformation sub-support, if a big hit is made in the second special symbol, jackpot D (15R probability variation big hit) is selected. After the jackpot D is executed, a gaming state with probability transformation support is set. In the gaming state with probability transformation support, the special symbol lottery probability is set to 10 times higher, the normal symbol lottery probability is set to 40 times higher, and the fluctuation time is also set to be easily selected (see FIG. 19). Further, the time (opening time) during which the electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state is also set longer than the normal gaming state and the latent probability changing gaming state. Therefore, when the player strikes right, the right first start port 631 can be easily won. In the present embodiment, 95% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls win the second entrance, and the remaining 5% is consumed as an out ball. Therefore, in the probable gaming state, about 99% of the right-handed game balls will win the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640, and 99% of the right-handed game balls play as winning balls. Paid out to the person. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease of the player's ball.

  In the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be short (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, the lottery is efficiently executed with the first special symbol. When the jackpot of the first special symbol is achieved in the probability variation gaming state, jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34%. Therefore, the latent probability changing game state is selected with a probability of 34%, and it becomes possible to play a game with a high probability until a win of at least two jackpots is won again. On the other hand, if the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal gaming state is set after the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state is set, the first lottery game or the second game with a high probability advantageous to the player until the jackpot is executed twice while the consumption of the holding ball is suppressed. A lottery game can be executed. Therefore, the player can feel that at least two jackpots are compensated when the latent probability changing gaming state is set.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is obtained in the normal gaming state, if the stored bonus ball of the first special symbol that has been stored becomes the jackpot B of the first special symbol, two jackpots are won. The normal gaming state will be set before getting. However, in the latent probability changing gaming state, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured so that 30 minutes are selected when it is out, so the second time of the first time when the latent probability varying gaming state is set. Since it is a case where a lottery game is a big hit (probability of 1/40), it is set so as not to frequently cause a disadvantage to the player.

  In addition, when the big hit is A in the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the holding ball of the first special symbol is determined first, and when the lottery result is determined to be the big hit E, the game of the big hit E Since 100 short-time games are awarded after the game is finished, the game is configured to be given a more advantageous state than the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is discouraged and the willingness to play is significantly reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 using a winning (start winning) at the left first starting port 63, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 as a trigger. However, there is provided a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. Left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right showing the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) or the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) which is one of the third symbols in the area Dm Three symbol rows in (right display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol displayed in the first display area (Dm) (whether it is special figure 1 or special figure 2) is determined and displayed according to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) and the gaming state with probability transformation support (probability gaming state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and there is no probability transformation support. In the gaming state (latency probability changing gaming state), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol type displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same special symbol may be always displayed. Good.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

  Note that the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn is formed at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state) is displayed. In the second display area Dn, two types of symbol rows “◯” and “×” as shown in FIG. 4B are displayed in parallel in two gaming states other than the probability variation gaming state. When the two “◯” symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the player is informed that the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been won. On the other hand, although details will be described later, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the treasure box symbol is displayed as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. It is displayed in the area Dn. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, a blinking display is performed in which the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B are alternately repeated with a short cycle (for example, 1 second). . And if you are in this probable gaming state,
When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, the display is stopped when the variation time elapses in the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a win, the display is stopped when the variation time elapses in the state shown in FIG. 9B.

  Furthermore, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol can be performed simultaneously. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit, the variation of the other special symbol in the variation is also forcibly deviating. It is configured to be stopped. During the probabilistic game, in addition to the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot E lotteries in the first special symbol lottery, a lottery lottery other than the jackpot is also executed. With regard to the jackpot, a jackpot of 15 rounds is executed, whereas a bonus game of 2 rounds is executed. Further, one round of jackpot game is executed until 30 seconds elapses or 10 game balls are won in the first variable winning device 65, but one round of jackpot game is 0.5 seconds. The time is set until 10 game balls win the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game, the first variable winning device 65 can hardly enter the game ball, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball.

  Here, even when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lottery result indicating the small win, the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating that it is out (see FIG. 9A). The In this case, when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate next time, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the size of the second display area Dn is expanded and the first display area Dm is expanded. The size of is reduced and displayed. When the treasure box is opened and the result of the determination is wrong, the word “sorry” is displayed from the treasure box as shown in FIG. 10 (a), and the lottery result is displayed to the player. It is displayed that it was off. On the other hand, if the determination result is a win, as shown in FIG. 10B, the word “congratulations” is displayed from the treasure box, and the player is shown that the lottery result is a win. The

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and in the normal gaming method, the lottery is mainly performed with the first special symbol. Is executed. However, according to the present embodiment, when the second lottery game with the second special symbol is a big hit, the big hit D (15R probability variable big hit) is always selected, which is advantageous to the player. It has become. Here, when the first special symbol is won in the small win, the change of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the new second special symbol is started, so the second lottery game is executed. Opportunities can be increased. Further, in that case, the second display area Dn is expanded and displayed as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, so that the player can expect a big hit with the second special symbol. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state (given after the end of jackpot E), the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. A third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the display area is based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol being displayed in the state that was displayed before the jackpot game was started, and the gaming state being switched after the jackpot game. Is switched.

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area. In the sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 8B, a reserved symbol “●” corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to 4, respectively, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols “●” are displayed in the secondary table display area Ds. .

  In this embodiment, the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are the same, but the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is “●” and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is “▲”. You may comprise so that it may distinguish and display. Further, the sub display area Ds is set to be divided into a display area for displaying the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and a display area for displaying the reserved symbol of the second special symbol (for example, the left region and the right region). Also good. Moreover, you may comprise so that a reservation symbol may be rearranged and displayed in the order of a fluctuation | variation start.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or four or more lottery games and corresponding start-ups are performed. Of course, each mouth may be provided so that the lottery results can be displayed at the same time.

  A first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 when a game ball wins the left first start port 63, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640. Is turned on. The left first start port 63 and the right first start port 631 are formed on the back side of the game board 13 with a common guide path through which the game balls entered are guided to the first start port switch. The main control device 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the left first start port 63, the right second start port 631, and the second start port 640 are also one of the winning ports from which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball is won.

  When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the variation is forcibly terminated if the other special symbol is being variably displayed. In the present embodiment, when a change that results in a big hit in one special symbol has been started, the special symbol that starts changing after the other is forcedly changed as a result of lottery. Is configured to start. Thereby, the malfunction that a jackpot game is started continuously or a jackpot game is started simultaneously can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery game is executed with one special symbol, the other lottery game is forcibly executed on the other side. You may comprise so that the lottery game as a lottery result may be performed and a jackpot game may be started continuously. Further, when either of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, the measurement of the variation time may be interrupted and the remaining fluctuation display may be continued after the big hit. In this case, during interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode “for example, alphabet h” in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any winning opening 63 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About configuration>
With reference to FIG. 2, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be further described in detail. In the present embodiment, a left-side channel in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right-side channel in which the right side of the variable display unit 80 flows down are formed. A left first starting port 63 is disposed below the center of the variable display unit 80, and is mainly configured so that a game ball flowing down the left channel is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the right channel. ing.

  A first normal symbol starting port 67a is arranged in the right channel, a first variable winning device 65 is arranged below it, a right first starting port 631 is arranged below it, and a second is placed on the right side. A normal symbol start port 67b is arranged. A second start port 640 is disposed below the right first start port 631. The game board 13 is provided with a plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball.

  The game ball launched into the right channel is inserted into the right first starting port 631 when the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b stand up) by the nail T4. It is configured not to sphere. When the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel are configured to flow down the left side of the right first start port 631. Note that the ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting port 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the first variable winning device 65, the width through which the game ball can pass is increased, and the rate at which the game ball flows down to the right side of the right first start port 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 toward the right first starting port 631, the width through which the game ball can pass is narrowed, and the proportion of game balls flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 can be increased.

  The game ball that has flowed down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by a nail group T3 (configured by five nails). The nail group T3 is arranged such that the width of each nail is narrower than that of one game ball, so that the game ball cannot pass. The game balls guided to the nail group T3 are prevented from flowing down below the second start port 640 by the nail group T2 (consisting of three nails), and all enter the second start port 640. It is configured.

  Here, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 640, it is set so that one prize ball is paid out to the player. Since 85% of the game balls launched into the right channel are configured to win the second starting port 640 (when the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state), the game balls launched by the player Of these, 85% are configured to be paid out as prize balls. Therefore, the player can suppress consumption (decrease) of the game ball as a holding ball by firing the game ball in the right channel as compared with launching the game ball in the left channel. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the right first start port 631 is configured not to win the second start port 640 by the nail group T2.

  Next, when the electric accessory 632 is in a special state (a state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are rotated until they are substantially horizontal), the left guiding member 632a flows down the left side of the first left start port 631. The flow path is configured to be closed. Thereby, when the electric accessory 632 is in a special state, it is configured such that a game ball that has flowed down the right channel is prevented from winning the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the number of times the first lottery game is executed with the first special symbol by increasing the number of winnings to the right first starting port 631 and decreasing the number of winnings to the second starting port 640. (Execution frequency) is increased. Furthermore, in the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, so that the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be reduced (lower).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state, since the variation time of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is set short, the game is performed so as to launch a game ball in the right channel, As already described, the percentage of game balls that win the second starting port 640 is set to 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel, so that the number of balls held by the player decreases. However, in this embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state is entered, the probability of winning a small hit with the second special symbol is set high. Further, the small hit game executed in the latent probability changing game state is set until the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65 reaches 3 seconds or 10 balls, and the opening time per round is set to other values. Since it is extended from the gaming state, a winning ball can be obtained with a small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of hitting during the latent probability change is set to be 15% consumed by flowing down the right channel, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the player's ball. Has been. Therefore, even in the latent probability changing game state, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease of the holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, it is prohibited to play a right-handed game (a game by launching a game ball into the right channel), and a game is placed in the second start port 640 in the normal gaming state. When the ball wins, an abnormal process is executed, and a warning display “Please play left-handed” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, in a normal gaming state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. Also good.

<Electric Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 88, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol And a variation type counter C3 used for selecting a variation pattern and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display unit 88), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45). It is updated periodically and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, in the RAM 203, the first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a and the second starting port 640 for storing respective counter values for winning for the left first starting port 63 and the right first starting port 631 are stored. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b in which each counter value is stored for winning is provided. In the present embodiment, the left first start port 63 and the right first start port 631 are provided with a maximum of four hold balls, and the second start port 640 is provided with a maximum of four hold balls, A total of up to eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, a game ball is played at the left first start port 631 or the right first start port 631 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game. When a ball wins, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins the second start port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is moved to a first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and various kinds of display for variably displaying the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Settings and control processing are executed.

  On the other hand, during a period when the special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is left on the first first start port 63. Alternatively, when winning the first start port 631 and the second start port 640 on the right, if the number of reserves for the winning start port is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value Acquired and stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start opening. In addition, when the number of reserves for the winning start opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and one prize ball (in this example, one game ball) is obtained. Only) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for the left first start port 63 and the right first start port 631, and four for the second start port 640. However, the number is not limited to four, and the upper limit may not be provided.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first per-random number counter C1 is acquired in common for each of the left first starting port 63 or the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is left first start port 63, right first start port 631, second start. At the timing of winning (start winning) in the mouth 640, it is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 b corresponding to the start opening in the RAM 203. The value of the random number that is a big hit is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. A jackpot is determined when the value matches a random jackpot value set by 202a (in this embodiment, “7” at low probability, “0-9” at high probability).

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hit values) that are jackpots is 1 when the probability is low, the value “7” is 10 when the probability is high, and the value “0-9” is It is stored in the first per random number table 202a.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type in the case of a big win. The first hit type counter C2 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in this embodiment). ), And then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the sphere is left first start port 63, right first start port 631, second At the timing of winning the start opening 640 (start winning), it is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning start opening. It should be noted that the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired is actually the timing at which a game ball is detected at the first start port switch (not shown) or the second start port switch (not shown). That is.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out of place. If there is, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, The stop type is that of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

  As described above, the jackpot type dedicated to the first special symbol, jackpot A, jackpot B and jackpot E are set as described above, and the jackpot type C and jackpot E are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the second special symbol. Has been. The jackpot A to the jackpot E are each composed of 15 rounds of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds at the start of the 13th round, and the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. When the game ball is detected by the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the big hit game is set to a probability change game state or a latent probability change game state in which the game state is a high probability state.

  On the other hand, in the case of big hit B and big hit E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 13th round. Since it takes 0.5 seconds or more for the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 to reach the probability change switch 65e3, if the jackpot B and jackpot E, the probability change switch 65e3 is set to the game ball. Is configured so that the game state after the jackpot is not set to a high-probability gaming state.

  Therefore, even if the jackpot game is started, since it is determined whether or not the probability change is given during the subsequent jackpot game, it is possible to keep expectation for the probability change for a long time. Furthermore, since the proportion of probability change given to the first special symbol is different from that of the second special symbol, the player can play a game by changing the expectation level where the probability change is given depending on the difference of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of tables, the jackpot type selection tables A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. FIG. This jackpot type selection table A is a selection table for determining the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot is in the normal gaming state (including the short-time gaming state). It is. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1), jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set. For jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set as a determination value, and for jackpot B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “34 to 99” is the determination value. Is set as As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), one type of jackpot C is set, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 99” is set as the determination value. That is, in the normal gaming state, when the jackpot in FIG. 1 is reached, jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34%, and jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%. On the other hand, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 100% when the jackpot in FIG.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot A is a state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the operating time of the electric accessory 632 is set longer. This is a big hit in which a V winning release pattern is set in which an opening pattern in which a game ball can be won is assigned to the probability changing switch 65e3 of the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot where no power support state is given and no V winning opening pattern is set. The jackpot C is set to the jackpot at which the electric support state is given and the V winning opening pattern is set.

  In this way, even in the normal gaming state, even if a big hit occurs in the second special symbol due to fraud etc. by setting only the big hit C as the big special type of the second special symbol that should not be played (changed) normally. In addition, it is configured so as to be able to suppress a problem that at least two jackpots are illegally granted in a high probability state without giving a latent probability changing game state.

  Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table B. The jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is established in the latent probability changing game state. In this jackpot type selection table B, jackpot A and jackpot E are set as jackpot types in special figure 1, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types in special figure 2, respectively.

  The jackpot E is a short jackpot at the time of 15 rounds, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change 100 times after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the jackpot probability is set to a low probability state. In addition, since the variation time of the special figure 1 is set to be long when shifting to the latent probability changing gaming state, it is generally the first special symbol variation that has shifted to the latent probability varying gaming state that is a big hit. Conceivable. In this case, there is an intention to rescue the player, and the jackpot E that is not selected in the normal gaming state is set to be selected instead of the jackpot B. Therefore, a player's discouragement can be suppressed and the malfunction which the motivation for a game falls remarkably can be suppressed.

  In the case of big hit in special figure 2, jackpot C and jackpot D are set respectively. The jackpot D is composed of a jackpot in which a latent probability change of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state is set, the probability that the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to the high probability state is set until at least two jackpot games are executed. . Therefore, for the player, the jackpot type is set such that the jackpot D is more advantageous than the jackpot C in which the probability variation gaming state is set.

  In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot C is set with “0 to 65” as a determination value, and the jackpot D is set with “66 to 99” as a determination value. Therefore, the jackpot C is set to be selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is won, and the jackpot D is selected with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player plays the game in the expectation that the jackpot D is selected when the big special symbol is a big hit in the latent probability changing gaming state.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used for determining the jackpot type when the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. In the jackpot type selection table C, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. The ratio at which the jackpot A is selected is set to 34% (determination value “0 to 33”), and the ratio at which the jackpot B is selected is set to 66% (determination value “34 to 99”). ).

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is set, the jackpot D is selected whenever the second special symbol is a jackpot, so that the latent probability variation gaming state is set and the player wins at least twice. The high probability state is configured to be easily set continuously until is executed. Here, in this embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and the electric accessory 632 is easily set to be in the special state (electric support). The number of balls entering the second starting port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, when the probability variation gaming state is entered, 3000 ms is selected at a rate of 191/199 for a normal symbol, and 30000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, the change time of 30000 ms having a long change time is selected with a low probability.

  Until this 30000 ms fluctuation time elapses, the electric accessory 632 is not operated in a special state, and during that time, it is easy for the game ball to win the second start port 640 (85 of the right-handed game ball). % Is a ball), so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased. On the other hand, during the probability variation game state, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the case of a deviation, the variation time of 1800000 ms is set as the variation time of the second special symbol. It is configured so that a new lottery is not efficiently executed even in a state where the holding ball is stored. However, the probability of hitting the first special symbol is set to 1/80 in the probability variation gaming state (see FIG. 15 (b)). The variation executed with the two special symbols is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the stored ball that is stored next is started. That is, by winning the small bonus with the first special symbol, the lottery opportunity with the second special symbol is increased, and it is set so that a lottery advantageous to the player can be easily executed. Therefore, the player can play a game in the hope of winning a small win with the first special symbol, and can increase the player's expectation in addition to the big win. Note that the small lottery probability may be set as an appropriate value as appropriate.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description of the various counters will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0.

  The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is the left first start port 63, the right first start port 631, or the second start port 640. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning a prize (start winning prize).

  In the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing of starting winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be acquired at the timing of starting the variation. Of course, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 may be selected at the start of fluctuation.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 (a) to 18 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in a low probability gaming state, and a latent probability variation game. Variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 18 (a)) for selecting a variation pattern in the state, Variation pattern selection table C (see FIG. 18 (b)) for selecting the variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state. ) Is set for each.

  In each variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern type is set corresponding to the number of reserved balls when the variation starts, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, and the determination result. Note that the type of variation pattern determined by the main control device 110 is a rough content of the variation pattern, and mainly the variation time and the variation type (non-reach and various reach) are determined. The voice lamp control device 114 is configured to determine more detailed contents of the variation pattern. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is out of the determination result, and an extremely long variation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. ing. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours are set. The business hours of the amusement store are generally long even from 9 am to 11 pm, so the business hours are 15 hours, and the time is longer than that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a big hit by playing with the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, a long variation time is set for a big hit. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer or the like that the game is being played with the second special symbol, the game store can perform illegal game monitoring and guidance with the correct game method.

  In the present embodiment, the winning time is also a long variation time in the second special symbol, but in the winning case, it may be configured with a short variation time such as 500 ms. By comprising in this way, the extremely long hit fluctuation | variation is performed by a 2nd special symbol, and the malfunction by which a hit | toe fluctuation | variation is not performed by a 1st special symbol during that period can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), in the latent probability changing game state, the variation time of the first special symbol when it is out of play is set to 180000 ms, and is set extremely long. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol that is a hit is composed of 500 ms and is set short. By configuring in this way, even when the first special symbol of the first change becomes a big hit E after shifting to the latent probability changing gaming state, it is difficult to understand that the transition to the latent probability changing gaming state. Furthermore, the jackpot game can be continuously executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (b), in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of deviation of the second special symbol is 180000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the hit variation time is set to 5000 ms, and is set in accordance with a period during which a treasure chest effect to be described later is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first and second special symbols are configured so that the variation display that is a big hit does not fluctuate at the same time. In the case of the configuration, the variation display time that is a big hit of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first special symbol The variation time that becomes the big hit of the symbol may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol that may determine the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, the second special in the meantime The jackpot C can be awarded to the player by winning the jackpot with a symbol. In this case, a configuration is conceivable in which, when a big win is started with one special symbol, the lottery game that is fluctuating with the other special symbol is invalidated. By configuring in this way, it is determined immediately after the jackpot C, which is a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player, and the probability variation gaming state is set, and the probability variation gaming state ends in a short period of time. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the above-described configuration in which the variable display with the success / failure determination result being the big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, the determination result of the first special symbol is a fluctuation that is out of place. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the variation time for the success / failure determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be displayed during the short-time game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed) can be reduced, and the number of lotteries with the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In addition, when the number of time reductions is until the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed 100 times, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 100 times continuously with the second special symbol coming off and changing. The number of times that the second special symbol is variably displayed during the short-time game can be effectively reduced by configuring the time longer than the time when variably displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description of the various counters will be continued. The first per-random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15C).

  When the first random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the sphere is changed to the first normal symbol start port 67a (through gate) or the second normal symbol start port 67b ( It is acquired when it is detected that the vehicle has passed through. The number of random numbers to be won is 5 in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5-9”. Further, in the high probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state, it is determined that the winning value is obtained when the value of the acquired first random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, and in the high probability gaming state, the acquired first random number counter C4 is acquired. When the value of the symbol is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the player has won the game, and the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88 as the stop symbol (second symbol). In the normal gaming state, the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are released once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment), and in the high probability gaming state, the predetermined time (in this embodiment) The opening operation of 1s) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

  When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable manner, and each counter based on the held ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. If no value is stored, a random number value is acquired from the first random number counter C4 in a normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the number of holdings corresponding to the random number value acquired from the first per-random number counter C4 (normal symbol holding 1 to 4). When a random number value is stored in each area, a normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON, and the normal symbol based on the random number value is stopped from being displayed, or 1 is obtained by digesting the hold. When data is shifted to the previous reserved area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area which is newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether the data is stored in the reserved area or whether the normal symbol is variably displayed is determined depending on which reserved area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display section 88 can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values. However, the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery game are selected. Set different counters for each game (second special symbol), and update them with different values by changing the update triggers and initial values of the various counters for the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Of course, the counter value may be configured.

  Thus, by configuring, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity, different counter values can be acquired. The fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the malfunction that the determination result of the success / failure is synchronized can be suppressed.

  In addition, even if a variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM or the like having a small storage area) can be achieved.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process at power-on (see FIG. 44). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. , Normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability variation valid flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, hour and middle counter 203t, big hit flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, pre-reading reserved ball storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, and other memory areas 203z Also it has the phrase.

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning at the first start port 64 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that game balls have won the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) are started. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the winning detection are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 631 during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is read from the counter buffer. Are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second start opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer in the same manner as the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start prize stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1), it corresponds to one start prize. The data is shifted to the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the first per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon detection of the start winning of the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is stored. This is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), The value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. A normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c includes four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag (not shown)) can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls in the order of passing through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (start winning prize) Are stored in order from the reserved area in the earlier order.

  In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Or, it is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect, the MPU 201 executes processes such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the first random number counter C4) stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored as the normal symbol holding. Shift to a ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning at the mouth 64 or the second starting port 640, the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed at the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Each counter counts up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 44, S1514). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that the game ball has won the left first starting port 63 or the right first starting port 631. When the counter value is stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the counter value stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), respectively. If stored, data stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is used as the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 23, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  Further, the change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a first normal symbol start port 67a or a second normal symbol start port 67b detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. On the first symbol display device 37 based on the passing of the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “start winning prize”) (the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed on the display device 88 up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 44, S1514). Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of the suspended balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 41).

  The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that the data of the first random number counter C4 is stored and being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. is there. When the value of the first random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number in which the reserved number is reduced and one reserved number is reduced), the value of the reserved area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set off, while the normal symbol flag (not shown) of the reserved area that is shifted and stored is set on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, a normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF.

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a probability change game state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the game state is a low probability game state (including a short-time game state). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON when the jackpot game ends (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on being set to ON. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  When the probability variation setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. May be configured to return to the officially set to ON. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the first variable winning opening 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. This probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1681 in FIG. 50). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1711 in FIG. 51). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, one is added and updated based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the first variable winning device 65 (FIG. 50). S1673). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharging number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are awarded to the first variable winning device 65. Is determined to match, the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, in the big hit A, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in the big hit B, the flow passage solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the big hit A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data for 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S1679 of the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, 1 is subtracted and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning to the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for discriminating the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention (in this embodiment, a voice “watching the liquid crystal”). In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 ball winnings in the first variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is decremented by one and updated by the processing of S1664 of the notification processing (FIG. 49, S1631) of the main controller 110. A notification command that is output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the notification counter 203m becoming zero. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  With this configuration, since the sound “Look at the liquid crystal” is output before the start of the 14th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, in the 13th round of the jackpot game, on the third symbol display device 81, a character of a girl is displayed, and a character of “attention” which is a notification that prompts the player to view the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is displayed. In the 14th round, since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, if the operation is watched by the player, the type of jackpot being executed is determined. In order for the player to continue to have an expectation that a probable game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game, the player makes the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6A) invisible. The notification effect is being executed. However, when the 13th round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is informed by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is performed. Thereby, after an interval effect is performed, a player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and a player's attention can be diverted from operation | movement of the switching member 65h.

  In this embodiment, it is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by informing the user to show the 3rd symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may alert | report so that the movement of the switching member 65h may be hidden by a player's hand by alert | reporting that the player's hand is held over the variable prize-winning apparatus 65. Moreover, not only the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 but you may comprise so that a player may be distracted by alert | reporting so that a decoration lamp 34 etc. may be seen to a player. Furthermore, it may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 13 rounds and informing the user to read it with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the effect that diverts attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 14th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem of determining whether the jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D or jackpot B, jackpot E is determined by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203o described later is added and updated by 1 (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for doing.

  The remaining ball timer 203o discharges the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 when one preset round ends and the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether the time necessary for the elapse of time. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance in the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203o has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings. (S1707 in FIG. 51). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that game balls are jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, illegally leaving the game ball in the first variable winning device 65, giving an impact at the start timing of the 14th round, causing the game ball to reach the switching member 65h earlier than actual, Even if it is a big hit E, it is possible to suppress the injustice to allow the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability variation | change game state is provided illegally.

  The probability variation valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) based on the flow passage solenoid 65k being ON is the probability variation switch 65e3. Indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203p described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. Thereafter, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the game ball is passed through the special discharge port 65e2 and passed through the probability change switch 65h, or played with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65h. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a sphere is pushed up and passed, or a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharge counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

  The short / medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols fluctuate in the short / short game state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. That is, in this embodiment, when the probability change gaming state is not set after the jackpot game, the game mode is shifted to the short-time gaming state 100 times.

  The big hit flag 203u is based on the winning of the left first starting port 63, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is a hit at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set to ON when it is determined. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised with the flag which can identify whether it is a jackpot corresponding to which symbol of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, “10” is set to the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol, and “01” is set to the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol, At “00”, the big hit flag 203u is set off.

  Here, since the jackpot flag 203u is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to ON at the start of the fluctuation. In this case, even if the other lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203u is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same way as a miss. Thereby, it can process so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously may not be performed with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol.

  In other words, when the variation display that is a big hit with either one of the special symbols is started, the variation display that is a big hit is not started on the other side, and only the out-of-change manner is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and independent jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. And you may comprise so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed. By adopting such a configuration, even if the variation display of the big hit B and the big hit E is started with the first special symbol during the probability variation gaming state, the variation time is set long, and the second special symbol is set. By configuring so that a lottery can be easily made in a short variation time, it is possible to easily configure a big hit with the second special symbol until the big hit B is started. Therefore, an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state is finished) is executed, and the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect for playing a game. Therefore, a fresh performance can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  The special figure 1 variation stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the jackpot game of the second special symbol starts to be executed while the first special symbol is variably displayed. In S1004 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the process of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204), it is set to OFF.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the process of S1011 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207), it is set to OFF.

  The pre-read hold storage area 203x stores determination information such as success / failure determination results, jackpot type, variation type, etc. for the hold balls stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. Storage area.

  The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. The small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display portion 88, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric accessory. A solenoid 209 made up of a solenoid for driving and the like is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange the displayed reserved symbol display in the order of the variable display start.

  A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the winning opening becomes an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222, at least a variation pattern selection table 222a is set.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. This variation pattern selection table 222a corresponds to a variation time indicated by a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, a rough variation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.), and a plurality of types of variation contents (for example, variation). One variation content is determined from reach variation patterns of different display contents having the same time and the same determination result.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f. , A special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, a special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, an effect counter 223j, a slave state setting area 223k, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Are stored with winning information. Based on the information stored in this winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can discriminate the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a fluctuating effect (variable) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). Display) and is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls for change display is added by entering the left first winning port 63 or the right first starting port 630, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol. When the change display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the first special symbol held after the storage. In order to notify the value of the ball counter 223b to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on a reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main controller 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the sub-status setting area 223h, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the current gaming status. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed-up gaming state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erasure switch (see FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) circuit 253 is pressed when the power is turned on (while turning on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122)). In this case, the RAM erase signal SG2 is output to the main controller 110 to clear the backup data. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is canceled, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after canceling the system reset via the bus line 240 and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, the left 7-segment LED of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment indicator 37b executes the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the right 7-segment LED is displayed. In the segment LED, a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) of the left first starting port 63, right first starting port 631, and second starting port 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is executed. A through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the sphere is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through-gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by predetermined control is performed. In this manner, control is performed so that the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can simultaneously perform variable display or stop display in a display manner indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) will be described in detail later, but the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has elapsed. The process of stopping the variable display in the process, and the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display when the second special symbol is variably stopped at the symbol showing the big win and the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed Is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in a variable display (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) will be described in detail later. If the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the processing for restarting the variable display is executed, while the temporary stop is performed. If not, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the hold data are executed. .

  After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable display (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described in detail later. Similar to the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the specified variation time of the second special symbol during variation display has elapsed. The process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game, and the variable display when the first special symbol is variablely stopped with the symbol indicating the jackpot and the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed A process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol being displayed is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in a variable display (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206) will be described in detail later. Similar to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), when the second special symbol variation is temporarily stopped. The process for resuming the variable display is executed. On the other hand, if it is not temporarily stopped, if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, A jackpot determination or variation pattern selection process based on the pending data is executed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303). . A process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 24, S305) will be described in detail later, based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set gaming state, the jackpot determination of whether or not the jackpot is executed.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which will be described in detail later, is a result of the success / failure determination based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability changing gaming state (probability changing) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation)) (S402: Yes), based on the random number table 202a per special symbol first for high probability, It is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (that is, the gaming state is the low probability gaming state (the probability variation is not in progress)) (S402: No), the special symbol first random number table 202a for the low probability is used. Based on (see FIG. 10B), it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

  It is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203u is on (S405). Here, when the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON, it indicates that a variation that becomes a jackpot is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the variation that becomes a big jackpot is not executed simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem in which jackpots are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the game store side becomes excessively large.

  In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is OFF, that is, when it is determined that the variation that becomes a big win is not started in the second special symbol (S405: No), the processing of S403 or S404 is performed. It is determined whether the executed lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S406: Yes), the jackpot flag 203u is set on for the first special symbol (S407). Thereafter, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 lottery result) is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type. (S409). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol is on (S405: Yes), or in the process of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out (S406). : No), special figure 1 deviation variation processing is executed (S410). The special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26, but setting of the off symbol when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out is executed.

  In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first random number C1 that is actually acquired is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u is already set on, that is, according to the second special symbol, When the big hit is started, the setting of forcible setting is forcibly executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the big win change is not executed at the same time, and the big win change is started in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress problems that cause excessive damage.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to perform the big hit variation at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute simultaneously. In this case, a special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, if the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, the fluctuation of one special symbol temporarily stops the measurement of the fluctuation time, It is conceivable to configure to temporarily stop.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special figure 1 fluctuation variation process (S410) which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 24, S203) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation variation process (FIG. 26, S410), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is on (S412: Yes), the first special symbol deviating symbol is set in the first special symbol display device 37 (S416). Thereafter, this process is terminated. As described above, when the small bonus is set for the second special symbol, the detachable symbol is forcibly set for the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that a variation that is a small hit is executed simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the process of S411, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the second special symbol (S411: No), whether or not the lottery result is a small hit is stored in the small hit random number table 202b. Based on the determination (S412). If it is determined that it is not a small hit (S412: No), the process of S416 is executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S412 that a small hit is made (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S414). A small hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), it is determined whether the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol in the process of S407.

  In the process of S501, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot has been set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (normal gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, probability varying gaming state, short-time gaming state) The variation pattern selection table 202e according to any one of the above is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state (S503). ). A variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 203e set in the process of S502 based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). Based on the selected variation pattern, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated (S505). Thereafter, the process of S507 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special figure 1 is out. A variation pattern selection process is executed (S506).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is on (S511: Yes), a small hit variation pattern is set (S512). In the case of small hits, one type of variation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Here, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3000 ms is set. A special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating a small hit is set (S513). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, out of place) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (see FIG. 16 (a) to (c)) is set (S514). Based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 from the set variation pattern selection table, a variation pattern is selected (S515). Based on the selected fluctuation pattern, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S516). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. After the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506) is executed, the process of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S507). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to ON (S601). Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to ON, in the second special symbol, it indicates that the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit is stopped and displayed. It shows that it is the timing to forcibly stop the fluctuation even before the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S601: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the first special symbol being changed is the end timing ( S602). If it is determined that it is not the time to end the variation of the first special symbol (S602: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation time (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (S603). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S603: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203203w is set to ON (S604). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of S604 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is on is set.

  A special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S605). The start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S606). Thereafter, the hour / middle counter 203t is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S607). Thereafter, the process of S609 is executed. In the process of S609, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S609). A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S610).

  On the other hand, in the process of S603, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is off for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (S603: No), the special figure 1 off stop process is executed (S608). ).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 30, this special figure 1 removal stop process (S608) is demonstrated. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 stoppage processing (S608). In the special figure 1 stop processing (S608), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). A special 2-variable stop command indicating ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is forcibly stopped) is set (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). Thereafter, the process of S627 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S621, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), whether the hour / medium counter 203t is greater than 0, that is, It is determined whether the game state is in progress (S625). If it is determined that the time is short (S625: Yes), the time-shortage counter is decremented by 1 and updated (S626). Thereafter, the process of S627 is executed.

  In the process of S627, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S627). A process of variably stopping the first special symbol that is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed. Thereafter, this process is executed. Here, returning to FIG. 29, after executing the special figure 1 stoppage process (S608), this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a variable manner at the same time, the second special symbol is used when the first special symbol is changed and stopped by the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON so as to execute the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, in the case where the second special symbol is to be changed and stopped based on the lottery result of the big win or the small win, the special figure 1 change stop flag 203v is set to ON so that the change of the first special symbol is stopped. It is forcibly executed. Thereby, the simultaneous change with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, when the first big symbol or the second special symbol has already begun to be a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly released as a result of the determination of whether or not it is missed. Fluctuation display is started. Therefore, it can suppress that big hit and small hit are forcibly performed continuously, and can suppress the malfunction in which euphoria becomes high too much.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the first special symbol retention ball number of each process from S301 to S306 with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) described above. The counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S305), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306). In each process from S701 to S706, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol reserved ball hit determination process (S705) Since the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) is the same except for the change, the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705), the first special symbol reservation ball execution area is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305) as compared to the process of S401. In the process of S801 (not shown), in the process of S408, in the process of S408, in the process of S808, in the process of S808, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) 2 (second special symbol) is the same as the processing of S409 and S410 except that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol in the processing of S809 and S810, respectively. Description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706), the special symbol 1 lottery result (first) is compared to the process of S501 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) described above. In the process in which the special symbol lottery result is S901, the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern command (first special symbol) is added to the special symbol 2 lottery result (second special symbol lottery result) for each process from S506 to S507. Is the same except that the process is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for each process of S906 to S907, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 36, S207), the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v of each process of S601 and S611 is compared with the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204) described above. Is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w in each process of S1001 and S1011. In the process of S602, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the end timing, but in the process of S1002, 2 It is determined whether the variation time of the special symbol is the end timing, and for each process from S603 to S610, S611 to S612, the special symbol 1 (first special symbol), the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203w. The special figure 2 variable stop command, the first special symbol jackpot start, and the special figure 1 confirmation command are S1003 to S1010 and S1011 to S1012. Special symbols), special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 1 fluctuation stop command, start of second special symbol jackpot, and special figure 2 confirmation command are the same except that they are changed. Is omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Can be made. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the lottery game is executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed at the same time, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, Since the change display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit stop display, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), it is determined whether the game ball has won any of the left first start port 63, the right first start port 630, or the second start port 640. Each counter value acquired up to the upper limit number of reserves (up to four each for the left first start port 63, the right first start port 630, and the second start port 640) is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second This is a process of storing in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or based on each counter value memorize | stored in each of the 2nd special symbol reservation ball | bowl storage area 203b, the process which predicts a determination result or the variation pattern etc. selected beforehand is performed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start winning) at the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 630, which is the first start port (S1101). . Here, winning to the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 630 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 630 (the start win has been received) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d Is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). This is determined as to whether the number of reserves for the left first start port 63 and the right first start port 630 is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the hold number is stored up to the upper limit value). . When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1104). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1105). Various counter values such as the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203a of the RAM 203 is obtained. Are each stored (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the number of held balls (S1106).

  Next, the first prefetch process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 39, but the determination result of the success / failure determination and the variation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Then, processing for determining the stop type and the like is executed.

  Next, for each process from S1108 to S1114, a game ball is awarded to the first start port (the left first start port 63 and the right first start port 630) executed in each process from S1101 to S1107. The only difference is that the process similar to the process performed on the second start port 640 is the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first look-ahead process (S1107) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch process (S1107).

  In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 39, S1107), first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the pre-read hold storage area 203x in the area with the smallest winning order (S1122).

  Based on the data stored in the read prefetch hold storage area 203x, the determination result is determined. In addition, the success / failure determination result determined here is determined in a case where it is a win in the normal gaming state. Since the variation time is varied and set depending on the number of holdings, the timing for starting the variation cannot be discriminated between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is not possible to determine the exact gaming state at the start of the variation. Therefore, it is only when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 having a common jackpot determination value is “7” in both the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state that the determination result can be accurately determined. Therefore, in the processing of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a win during the normal gaming state.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1123 that the result of the determination is a big win (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big win, and the first winning command indicating the jackpot type is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1123 that the result of the determination is wrong (S1123: No), a first winning command indicating that the prefetch lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place is set (S1125). . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a first start port (the left first start port 63 or the right first start port 630) and is newly stored on hold, the stored information is stored. Based on the above, the determination result is determined before the start of the fluctuation and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. It is possible to execute an effect that displays a notice symbol or the like and suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of prefetching, the determination of success / failure is determined as the normal gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the gaming state at the start of variation is accurately performed, and the determination of success / failure is executed based on the gaming state. You may comprise. In this case, the variation pattern selection is not varied according to the number of reserved balls as in this embodiment, but is configured to select a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. Discrimination becomes possible. When the prefetching is executed, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the change order until the change of the hold ball starts to change based on the stored information.

  Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second prefetch process (S1114).

  In the second prefetch process (FIG. 40, S1114), the first prefetch process (FIG. 39, S1107) described above is awarded to the first starting port (the left first starting port 63 or the right first starting port 630). This is a process for pre-reading the hold data based on it and making various determinations, whereas it is a process for making a variety of determinations by pre-reading the hold data based on winning in the second start port 640. Since the same processing is executed only in the difference, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the normal symbol variation process (S106) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1201). The normal symbol (second symbol) hitting includes the period from the time when the second symbol display unit 88 displays the winning symbol to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 632 being performed. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1201: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display unit 88 is in a variable display (S1202). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1222). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1220 and the processing of S1221, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S1222 (S1222: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1222 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S1222: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display unit 88 is set (S1223). . In the process of S1223, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the second symbol display section 88 displays the “○” symbol as a second symbol in a stopped display (lighted display). ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S1218, the “x” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display unit 88 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the processing of S1223, the variable display in the second symbol display unit 88 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set in the processing of S1213 and the processing of S1218. 2 Stop display (lighting display) on the symbol display section 88.

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1224). If it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1224: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1225). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is out of place (S1224: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the normal symbol is not in a variable display (S1202: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1204). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1205).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on in each area. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the first random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (that is, not 0) (S1208). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 0 (that is, not in time reduction) (S1208: No), the hit determination of the second per-random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) for low probability. Based on the value, the determination result is acquired (S1211). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203t is not 0 (that is, the hour is shorter) (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted ( S1209). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted (S1209: Yes), the processing of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1209: No), the hit determination value of the second per random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) for high probability. Based on the above, the determination result is obtained (S1210).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a win (that is, it is out of place) (S1212: No), the display mode of “x” that is the display mode at the time of losing is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of “O” that is the display mode of the win is It is set (S1213).

  It is determined whether the gaming state is in the short-time gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1214). When it is determined that the time-short game is not being played (S1214: No), the processing of S1217 is executed. When it is determined that the time-short game is being played (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1215). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted, the process of S1216 is executed.

  In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guide members (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b) of the electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1216). On the other hand, in the process of S1215, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (that is, the low probability gaming state) (S1215: Yes), the electric accessory 632 The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1217).

  It is determined whether the gaming state is in the short-time gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1219). If it is determined that the time is short (S1219: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is obtained as the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (fig. 19), the variation time is determined (S1220). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the usual fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined based on the value of the usual figure fluctuation type counter CS2 from the usual figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 19, in the usual figure variation pattern selection table 202f, a variation pattern of a normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state. Except for the probability variation gaming state (probability variation: with electric support), there is one variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal variation variation counter CS2. On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the change time of 3000 ms is determined by the determination value “0 to 190”, and the change time of 30000 ms is determined by the determination value “191 to 198”.

  Thereby, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time longer than the other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. When this long fluctuation time is selected, the electric accessory 632 is not operated until the fluctuation time elapses. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, when the second starting port 640 is disposed below the electric accessory 632 and the electric accessory 632 is activated, the left starting member 632 a can win the second starting port 640. The flow path is blocked. Therefore, in the meantime, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 640 is restricted.

  Here, as described above, when a variation time (30000 ms) having a long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so that the right-handed game during that time About 85% of the balls will win the second starting port 640. Therefore, by selecting a long variation time as the variation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation gaming state, the number of winnings at the second start port 640 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (c), during the probability variation gaming state, a jackpot D is always selected when winning in the second special symbol, and a jackpot that is more advantageous than a jackpot in the first special symbol is selected. Selected. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, the player who is drawn by the second special symbol can be advantageous to the player when it is a big hit rather than the lottery by the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give a period that is advantageous to the player by increasing the winning to the second start port 640 during the probability variation gaming state.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the first random number counter C4 when a game ball passes.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 42, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301). Here, it is detected over three timer interruption processes that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1303).

  The ball does not pass through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. However, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1303: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1303). : Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S1304). Then, the value of the first random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203f of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1305). In the processing of S1305, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 0, the normal symbol reservation 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal symbol hold 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal symbol hold 3 area, if the value is 3, the normal symbol hold 4 area first. The area.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1401), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1501). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1502). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1504). If it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505). (S1505: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown was not normally completed, the process proceeds to S1512 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. Therefore, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1512. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1512). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1513, S1514) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1510.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (S1507: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1510). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S1511). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (S1600) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). In the main process (S1600), roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is sent to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 ends, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). The probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when a big hit A or big hit C is executed, a game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). If it is determined that the game has entered, a process for setting data indicating that the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability-changing game state is set in the jackpot state setting area.

  When the probability variation setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 632 is executed. Thereafter, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

  Next, the display control process of the 2nd symbol (for example, symbol of "(circle)" or "x") by the 2nd symbol display part 88 is performed (S1258). Briefly, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display unit 88 displays the value. Then, the variation display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory 632 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251, and the processes after S1251 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1261, S1262).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1252 (S1262).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the first per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  In the process of S1256, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 40 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1263 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1259 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power supply interruption state, The process can be started from S1251. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1251 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S1301), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1251. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) or the start winning process (see FIG. 38) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 632 attached to the first right winning port 630 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the variation is determined according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) has ended. In the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 65), the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated. ) Is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1607). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the second symbol display device starts the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S1223 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S1212 or the processing of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 41). )

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1609). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1609: Yes), the process proceeds to S1601, and the processes after S1601 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1609: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1610, S1611).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1602 (S1611).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1608, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 43 has been executed, the power-off process after S1612 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1613). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1614), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1608 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1601 to S1607, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1601. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1601 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initialization processing (S1501) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1601. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1604). This jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a big jackpot or a small jackpot of a special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 29), the process of S1006 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36), or S624 of the special special figure deviation stop process (see FIG. 30). If the process of S1024 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see FIG. 37) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot or the jackpot is set, the special symbol jackpot or the jackpot is started. judge. In the process of S1621, when the big winning or the small winning of the special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), an opening command is set (S1622), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1621, if the special symbol big hit or small hit is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit or small hit is being made (S1623). During the special symbol jackpot or small jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) being displayed. , During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol jackpot game. If the special symbol jackpot is not being hit in the processing of S1623 (S1623: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the special symbol is big hit or small hit, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1625). The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 47, but the opening setting to the first variable winning device 65 and the probability variable solenoid in each round corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1641. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In this way, each operation of the first variable prize-winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle Such problems can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability changing solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 is set. The small hits consist of two rounds, and the open / close door 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1624 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (S1626). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1626 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the end timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball thrown time has elapsed. It is determined as When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: Yes), an ending process is executed (S1630). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the ending process (S1630) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1651). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1652). The probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1653). Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to be off based on the probability variation flag 203g being turned on. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is passing the probability variation switch 65e3, and to set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable gaming state until the big hit game ends. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1629, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), a notification process is executed (S1631). Here, the details of the notification process (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1631).

  In the notification process (S1631), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1631). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1631: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632). The determination of the end timing of the 13th round is performed when it is detected in the 13th round that 10 balls have been won or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1632 that it is not the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: No), this processing is ended. Here, by setting the 2-second counter in S1633, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the interval time, which is the ball throwing time after the 13th round is finished, and the sound of watching the liquid crystal is heard. Is output. Therefore, although the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, the player is attracted attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Thus, the player can be prevented from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed across the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), a notification command is set (S1666). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the sound output setting “Look at the liquid crystal”.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1631) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1632). Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the winning process (S1632) will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1632).

  In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S1671). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). When it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1671: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673). Thereafter, the process of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1672: No), the processing of S1674 is executed.

  In the process of S1674, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set (S1676). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). Thereafter, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to be on, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown away after the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1674 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the processing of S1678 is executed.

  In the processing of S1678, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1679). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passing switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1681). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682). Thereafter, the process of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1680, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the process of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1684). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1685). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1688). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1688: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to off (S1690). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1690). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the process of S1680 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the ball removal time. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1633). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality process (S1633) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality process (S1633). In the abnormal process (S1633), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 51, S1633), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1701). If it is outside the round valid period (S1701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1703). Thereafter, the process of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the processing of S1704 is executed.

  In the processing of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1705) because it is during the ball throwing time period. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the number of discharges (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the number of winning (value of the winning number counter 203j) match. Is determined (S1707).

  If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the processing of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). Thereafter, the process of S1709 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65 and the jackpot B.

  In the processing of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1710). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to initial values (S1711), and then this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 61, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S2116 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 53). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the information on the occurrence of power failure from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 53, S2113), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S2116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S2116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2116 is executed (see S2115 in FIG. 53). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If the time has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2110. Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S2101 is processing related to display (production) in S2102 to S2110, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111 and the variable display setting process of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S2111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2112. Details of this command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2112, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S2112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2116). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination processing (S2111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S2111) will be described below.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 54, S2111), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is executed (S2202). The special figure 1 variation start process (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the settings necessary for variably displaying the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 83. Is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S2202) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2241), and the fluctuation pattern type is determined from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Extract (S2242). The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command to notify the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the processing of S2242 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent probability changing gaming state (a gaming state without probability changing power support) (S2243). If it is determined that the gaming state is other than the latent probability changing gaming state (S2243: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the game is in the latent probability variation game state (S2243: Yes), is the variation of the first special symbol variation starting to fluctuate a variation that results in a big hit E (15R normal big hit: 100 electric support)? It is determined (S2244). When it is determined that the variation is not the big hit E (S2244: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation is a big hit E (S2244: Yes), a character indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A and 63B) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2245). ). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing gaming state is entered, in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous for the player is set to be short for the variation time. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the first special symbol that is mainly executing the game is set to be long. As a result, when the player shifts to the latent probability changing game state, the player turns right and plays a game so that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to start varying simultaneously. Here, in the latent probability variation game state, in the second special symbol, a high probability game (probability variation) is always given when a big win is obtained, but in the first special symbol, a normal probability game (low probability game) is obtained in the case of a big hit. There is a possibility of being awarded by lottery. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, even if the jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot: no electric support) is awarded in the first special symbol, and the jackpot E is the variation that starts with the first special symbol after the jackpot game Immediately, it will shift to the normal gaming state.

  As described above, normally, the third symbol display device is based on the start of the change to the big hit E in the first special symbol after the transition to the latent probability changing game state in which the game is mainly played in the second special symbol. In 81, a chance zone (notification mode indicating a short-time gaming state or a probable gaming state) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the player displays the heaven zone (notification mode indicating that the game is in the latent probability changing game state) on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the player receives two big hit games. Until it is executed, it recognizes that a high probability state (probability change) is maintained (highly likely). However, in the chance zone, the player is not sure that the probability change gaming state will be awarded even after the next jackpot, and recognizes that it may be in the short-time gaming state (low probability state). While playing games.

  Thus, for example, when the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state and the first variation of the first special symbol is a variation that becomes a big hit E, the heaven zone is displayed normally, but the chance zone is displayed. It will be. Thereby, the malfunction which a player becomes discouraged within a short time can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the special chart 1 variation start process (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command ( S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. This is used when setting the second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  When the process of S2302 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability change gaming state (a gaming state with probability transformation support) (S2203). If the gaming state is other than the probability variation gaming state (S2303: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the determination result of the second special symbol starting to fluctuate is a big hit (S2304). Here, the discrimination is executed by discriminating whether the variation pattern is a big hit from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command.

  In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big win (S2304: Yes), a notice effect command per treasure box is set for the display control device 114 (S2305). . On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong, a treasure chest removal notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2306).

  Here, the notice effect command per treasure box is a command for instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, when a transition is made to the probability-changing gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. In the display area Dn, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn is a treasure box symbol, and the display mode shown in FIG. 9A and the display mode shown in FIG. Are repeatedly displayed in a short period (for example, every 0.5 seconds), and can be displayed as blinking.

  Here, when the probability variation gaming state is set, if the result of determining whether the second special symbol is right or wrong is out, the long deviation variation pattern C (1800000 ms) is selected. Therefore, the frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started is extremely reduced. However, if you win a small win with the first special symbol, based on the stoppage of the change, the change of the second special symbol that is changing is also forcibly stopped and is newly stored after the small hit game The change for the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started. In this case, the player expects that the variation that becomes a big hit in the second special symbol that is more advantageous than the first special symbol is easily started.

  When the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the first display area Dm is reduced and the treasure box is enlarged and enlarged in the empty display area. Is displayed. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode that vibrates for about 2 seconds, when the treasure box is opened and the determination result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and it is informed that the second special symbol is a big hit. And the alerting | reporting aspect which shows changing to the latent probability change game state of "Heaven zone entry determination!" Is displayed. Also, a notification mode for instructing to stop the launch of the game ball “Stop firing!” Is also displayed.

  Here, instructing to stop the launch is that the game is mainly executed with the first special symbol in the probability variation game state, but the game is mainly performed with the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state. Therefore, when a game ball enters the right first start opening 630 and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is stored, it is a chance that a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed. The failure can be suppressed by instructing to stop the launch.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong, as shown in FIG. 10A, the display for opening the treasure box is executed in the same manner as the case where the result of determination of success / failure is a big win. The word “sorry” indicating that the determination result is out of place is displayed. After that, when 5 seconds have passed after the start of fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, and blinking is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol has elapsed. Is done.

  Thereby, even if the player has a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of the change of the second special symbol, and thereafter Can focus on the variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game is easy to understand, and the player can play the game with good feeling.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), stop type command reception processing is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2311). The stop type (big hit A to big hit E, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable.

  It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a normal gaming state (S2313). If the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether the stop type is a big hit A (15R probability variation big hit: no electric support) (S2314). If it is determined that the stop type is other than jackpot A (S2314: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type is jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the first special symbol (special diagram 1) hold 1 (the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a in the fastest digestion order area) ) Is determined as to whether or not the result of determining whether or not the holding ball is a big hit E (15 rounds, normal big hit: 100 times of electric support) (S2315). Here, the jackpot random number value of the corresponding reserved ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b and determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a first hit random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) and a jackpot type selection table 202d (FIG. 15) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. 16 (a) to (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main controller 110, It is configured such that the sound lamp control device 113 can determine whether or not the result is correct in the probability variation state.

  In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the “chance zone entry” character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot game is ending. A display command to be instructed is set to the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not the big hit E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the character “entering the heaven zone! Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the latent probability changing game state, the probability changing game is easily set continuously until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that at least two jackpots have been committed when the characters of the heaven zone are displayed. In addition, since it is configured to be displayed at the end of the jackpot game, the player can play the game until the end of the jackpot game, expecting the transition to the latent probability change game state, and can improve the fun of the game .

  In addition, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state, if it is determined that the jackpot E wins in the latent probability change game state in the first special symbol hold 1, in the jackpot A ending, the short-time game state or the probability change game state “Chance zone entry !!” is displayed to indicate that the player is not aware that the jackpot game has been confirmed to occur at least twice, and in the short-time game state or the probable game state Recognize that there is a game. Therefore, the player can hardly recognize that the game has shifted to the latent probability changing game state, and the discouragement of shifting to the time-saving game state in a short time can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2305: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2207). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the second special symbol reserved ball included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter e (that is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is an audio lamp The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the control device 113 is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S2208).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball wins (start winning) the left first start port 63, the right first start port 630 or the second start port 640. Therefore, every time there is a start winning, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol of the main controller 110 by the process of S2207. It can be adjusted to the values of the symbol holding ball counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when a start winning is detected. Then, it can be set to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), winning command processing is executed (S2210). Details of the winning command process (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command process (S2210). In the winning command process (S2210), first, the received winning command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be identified, and the reservation order (the number of held balls) and the determination result in the normal gaming state can be determined. Yes. Furthermore, the counter value obtained at the time of starting winning is composed of commands that can also be discriminated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (S2402). In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the low probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability change is not in progress) (S2402: Yes), whether or not there is information on the probability change jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223. Is determined (S2403). In the process of S2403, if it is determined that there is no probability variation jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the process of S2403 and S2404 is not executed, and the process directly proceeds to S2405. On the contrary, when it is determined that there is information on the probability variation jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: Yes), a notification lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2405. The notification lottery process in S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of S2405, other processes are executed (S2405), and the winning command process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the notification lottery process (S2404) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is a determination value (S2502). In the processing of S2502, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (counter in the range of 0 to 198) is a determination value (in this embodiment, “0 to 50”) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command is displayed on the display control device 114 for displaying the characters “Please stop firing!” To inform the symbol display device 81 to stop the launch of the game ball (S2503). The process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when winning information that is a promising big hit, that is, a big hit A is received in the normal gaming state, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the player to stop firing. Here, when shifting from the normal gaming state to the latent probability changing gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, and the game with the second special symbol becomes the main gaming method. However, when the big hit A is won in the normal gaming state, if a holding ball for the first special symbol is stored, a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player is executed in the first special symbol even during the latent probability changing gaming state. It will be. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the hold to win the jackpot A is stored in the normal gaming state, a notification to stop the launch of the game ball is executed by lottery, so the player can play the game ball at an early timing. Firing can be stopped and winning to the left first starting port 63 can be suppressed. In addition, the player can recognize early that the jackpot is A by being notified of the stop of the launch, and can diversify the effects of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch stop notification is executed by lottery. However, when the big hit A holding ball is stored, it may be configured to be notified.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the winning command process (FIG. 58, S2210) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that no winning command has been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that a status command is received (S2211: Yes), status command reception processing (S2212) is executed. Details of the status command reception process (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the state command reception process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the status command reception process (S2212).

  In the state command reception process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed based on the state command received from the main controller 110 (S2601). Whether the gaming state has been changed is determined by comparing the gaming state information set in the sub-status setting area 223k with the received gaming state. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state (that is, the time saving gaming state) (S2602). When it is determined that the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state (that is, the short-time gaming state) (S2602: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the normal gaming state is set (S2603). Here, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (“Ox” in the present embodiment) is displayed in the second display region Dn. Thus, a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display characters of “lower bound zone” indicating the normal gaming state is set to the display control device 114 (S2604). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S602 that the gaming state has been changed to a state other than the normal gaming state (S2602: No), the gaming state has been changed to a latent probability changing gaming state (a gaming state without a probability changing power support). A determination is made (S2605). In the process of S2605, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state (S2605: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the latent probability changing gaming state is set (S2606). Here, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display region Dn (“Ox” in this embodiment). Thus, a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set. In the first special symbol hold 1, it is determined from the winning information storage area 223 b whether hold information for determining the jackpot E is stored (S 2607). When the hold information in which the hold 1 in the special figure 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the characters indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62B) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display command to be set is set (S2608). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a jackpot E (S2607: Yes), a display command for displaying characters indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). . Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2605 that the game state has shifted to a gaming state other than the latent probability changing gaming state (ie, the probability changing gaming state) (S2605: No), the probability changing gaming state (the gaming state with probability changing support) is set. A corresponding main display area setting command is set to the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the second display region Dn (the treasure chest symbol in this embodiment (FIG. 9A)). (See (b))), a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set.

  A display command for displaying the chance zone characters on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. In the process of S2612, the state of the gaming state indicated by the received state command is set in the slave state setting area 223k (S2612). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Meanwhile, returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the status command reception process (S2212), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a status command has not been received (S2211: No), processing according to another command is executed (S2219).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2112). This variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2705 is performed. Migrate to On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

  Next, in the process of S2703, the change pattern in the change display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 change pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Obtained from 223z, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is generated (S2703). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). When the display is set), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decreased by 1 (S2704).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is not on (that is, off) (S2705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2302 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2205), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Thus, a display variation pattern command for the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the second special symbol). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is reduced by 1 (S2708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set to ON (that is, is OFF) (S2709: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. If the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set off, and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set off (S2710). ).

  In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 is given a stop type (either 15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit) based on the stop type. A display special figure 1 stop type command for notification is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 determines whether the stop type (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit) ) Is displayed (S2712). Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the judgment result is out of place. Is done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

  With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are variably displayed simultaneously. Can do.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the player can play a game by switching a special symbol that sets a long-time variation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the transition of the gaming state. It was configured to control possible special symbols. In the latent probability changing state, only the jackpot that becomes the probability changing gaming state is set to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the jackpot, so the probability changing gaming state is set again after the jackpot is executed. Is done. Therefore, for the player, when entering the latent probability changing game state, it is usually possible to set the probability changing state until the jackpot is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that the jackpot is guaranteed twice when entering the latent probability changing gaming state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is configured that 85% of the right-handed game balls win the second start opening 640 in a state where the electric accessory 632 does not operate. Furthermore, in the latent probability change game state, it is set to win a small hit with the second special symbol, the lottery probability is about 14% of the right-handed game balls to the player as a winning ball in the small hit game It is set with the probability of being paid out. Therefore, when the operating frequency of the electric accessory 632 is set to be low (non-electric support state), even in the latent probability changing game, the game is performed in a state in which the decrease in the player's ball is suppressed when a right-handed game is played. be able to.

  Furthermore, the game is set so that the game shifts from the latent probability change game state to the probability change game state whenever a big hit is made with the second special symbol. Here, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is increased and the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened. And, if a big hit with the first special symbol, a big hit that shifts to either the latent probability changing gaming state or the normal gaming state is given by lottery, so can the player get two big hits again? You can play games with the expectation of Moreover, it can suppress that gambling nature becomes high by making it transfer to a normal game state.

  Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, when the big hit is made in the first special symbol that mainly plays the game, the lottery ratio of the big hit A to which the latent probability changing game state is given is set lower than the lottery ratio of the big hit B. It is possible to increase the difficulty of shifting to the probable gaming state and suppress the increase in gambling.

  In the present embodiment, the game state is configured to be switched when a jackpot game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state can be switched according to the type of the jackpot even when a bonus game is won. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the gaming state is switched by configuring the small win more easily than the big win. Therefore, even when the gaming state is set to be disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to switch to a gaming state that is more advantageous by winning a small hit, and the player can be expected to win a small hit. In addition, even when an advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible to switch to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, and gambling can be suppressed.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group> (2-loop configuration)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. In a gaming machine having at least a first award game and a second award game that is different from the first award game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. In the state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second privilege state is set after execution of the second privilege game, and the first privilege game is executed when the second privilege state is set and the first privilege game is executed. The first advantageous state is set after the game is executed. Gaming machine A1, wherein is.

  At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, at least a first bonus game that gives a bonus advantageous to the player and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game are executed by the bonus game executing means. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the second privilege game is executed. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. Thereby, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that a state advantageous to the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of bonus games are executed, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is the first advantageous state. When a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state can be set, and the third privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the specific state is set after the third privilege game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The state setting means sets a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the third privilege game is executed. Thereby, in the second advantageous state, the specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuing state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling nature of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, so that the advantage given to the player is excessive. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is improved by the privilege game executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can expect the privilege game to be executed.

  In either the gaming machine A1 or A4, a start condition determining means capable of determining whether a first start condition and a second start condition different from the first start condition are established, and the start condition determining means And a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the special game executing means is configured to perform a specific lottery by the lottery means. A gaming machine A5, which executes the privilege game based on the determination that the result is established.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine A1 or A4, the following effects are produced. That is, the start condition determining means determines whether the first start condition and the second start condition different from the first start condition are satisfied. A lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the fact that the start condition determining means determines that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that a specific lottery result has been established, the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. This makes it possible for the player to expect the first start condition and the second start condition to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the gaming machine A5 has a regulation means for regulating establishment of the second start condition.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the establishment of the second start condition is regulated by the regulating means, so that the player There is an effect that a disadvantageous state can be easily set.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, a first identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the first start condition and a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the second start condition. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying each of the two identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information simultaneously. A gaming machine A6 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second start condition are respectively displayed by the dynamic display means. Dynamically displayed on the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed simultaneously by the dynamic display means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the gaming machine A7 has release means for releasing the restriction by the restriction means based on the specific advantageous state being set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the restriction by the regulating means is released by the releasing means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation that a specific advantageous state is set.

  A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, and an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. And a control means for facilitating setting of the advantageous state by the setting means when the privilege game is executed next based on the advantageous state being set by the setting means. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine A8, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the control means by the setting means when the advantageous game is executed next time. It is possible to set it continuously. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch between advantageous and unfavorable and prevent unfavorable side)
The first lottery game is performed based on the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entrance into the first entrance. And a lottery game executing means for executing a second lottery game based on having entered the second entrance, and the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game. A switching means for switching between one state and a second state in which the second lottery game is advantageous over the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity, and a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means A gaming machine B1 having suppression means for suppressing execution of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game executing means on the basis of having entered the first entrance. Further, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game executing means based on the fact that the player has entered a second entrance different from the first entrance. Switching between a first state in which the second lottery game is disadvantageous to the player over the first lottery game and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity It is done. Execution of a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means is suppressed by the suppression means. As a result, the disadvantageous lottery game is prevented from being executed by the suppression means, so that the player can easily execute the advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that causes a significant disadvantage to the player.

  In the gaming machine B1, first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means, and second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means, and dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The dynamic period determining means has a longer dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a lottery game switched adversely by the switching means than a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a lottery game switched advantageously. A gaming machine B2 that makes it easy to determine a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Further, the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is respectively determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is advantageously switched to the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is disadvantageously switched by the switching means is determined dynamically. It is easy to determine by means. Thereby, it can suppress that the game switched disadvantageously is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can discriminate a game that is advantageously set.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, it has a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the firing force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player, The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where a game ball launched from the launching unit can enter when the player performs the same operation on the adjusting unit. A gaming machine B3, which is characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means. The launching force of the game ball fired by the launching means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the player's operation. The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where game balls launched from the launching unit can enter when the player performs the same operation on the adjusting unit. Thereby, the player can execute a lottery game advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player, The privilege granting means is set such that a privilege grant ratio that is advantageous to a player is set higher when the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game. A gaming machine B4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, a privilege is given to the player by the privilege granting means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game as compared to the first lottery game, a privilege grant ratio that is advantageous to the player is set higher. Thereby, when the game in the second lottery game is set to be advantageous for the player, a more advantageous state can be set for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the privilege granting means is either the first privilege or the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that one of them is given and the switching means switches to the second state on the basis of the provision of the second privilege by the privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, as the privilege, either the first privilege or the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Based on the provision of the second privilege by the privilege granting means, the switching means switches to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the first lottery game or the second lottery game is the bonus given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting unit until a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that a ratio at which a set privilege set so as to easily become a specific lottery result is set higher than a privilege for the first lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or until the specific condition is satisfied. Since the ratio at which the set privilege is set such that the second lottery game is likely to become the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game, the second lottery game is executed. This has the effect of improving the player's expectations.

  In the gaming machine B6, the gaming machine is configured such that at least the set bonus is given to the bonus given to the second lottery game by the bonus granting means. B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, at least the set privilege is provided to the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second lottery game is executed can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a first flow path through which game balls can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entrance opening are connected to the first flow path. A gaming machine B8, which is arranged in each of the second flow paths, and the second entrance is arranged in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively, Since it is arrange | positioned at 2 flow paths, there exists an effect that the state which performs only a 1st lottery game can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the suppression unit notifies information indicating that the disadvantageous lottery game is being executed. A gaming machine B9 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the restraining means confirms that a disadvantageous lottery game is executed when a lottery game disadvantageous to the player is executed. Since the notification information shown is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the lottery game executing means is configured to be capable of executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are executed simultaneously by the lottery game executing means, so that the game can be performed efficiently. There is an effect that can be done.

<Feature C group> (Electric Chu configuration)
The first lottery is executed based on the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entrance into the first entrance. And a lottery means for executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on the game ball having entered the second entrance, and the first entrance to the first entrance Variable means that can be varied between a first state that restricts entry and a second state that makes entry easier than the first state, determination means that executes determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and determination And a variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state when a specific determination result is determined by the means, and based on establishment of a predetermined condition, And a restricting means for restricting entry or restricting execution of the second lottery. Tricks machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means on the basis of having entered the first entrance. Further, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The variable means changes between a first state that restricts entry into the first entry port and a second state that makes entry easier than the first state. The variable means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control means when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the restriction means restricts the entrance to the second entrance and the execution of the second lottery. Thereby, a state advantageous to a player and a disadvantageous state can be set by the regulating means. Therefore, there is an effect that a change in interest can be given to the player and the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance, and the variable means enters the second entrance by the variable means when the variable means is in the second state. It is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down the flow path of the ball, and the restricting means sets the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, whereby the second incoming ball A gaming machine C2 that restricts entry into the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is disposed so as to prevent the game ball flowing down the flow path entering the second entrance by the variable means. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the entry into the second entrance is restricted by the restriction means. Thereby, the entrance to the 2nd entrance can be controlled with easy composition. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the game machine C1 or C2 includes a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entrance is defined by the first flow path. And the second flow path, and the variable means is disposed at the first entrance opening disposed in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. Since the variable means is arranged at the first entrance opening arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that it is possible to easily configure the game ball flowing down the second flow path into the first entrance opening.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery, and the dynamic display thereof Dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the means, and the restricting means The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that execution of the second lottery is restricted by making it easy to determine a long dynamic display period as a target display period by the dynamic display period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. By making the dynamic display period long as the dynamic display period for the second identification information easy to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the execution of the second lottery is restricted by the restricting means. Therefore, there is an effect that execution can be restricted to the second lottery with an easy configuration.

<Feature D group> (Continuously up configuration)
Based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance, A lottery means for executing a second lottery that is advantageous to the player over the first lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result on the display means and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery on the display means; Dynamic display period determining means for respectively determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display determining means A dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period. Setting means capable of setting a state and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined, and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped in a specific stop display mode When displayed, as a privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and a privilege given to the player by the privilege granting means, the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery A privilege determining means for determining at least one of the first privilege and the second privilege that is less granted than the first privilege, and either the first identification information or the second identification information. When one is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode. Stop display And when the long state is set by the setting means, the setting means for easily determining the second privilege by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Game machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the game ball having entered the first entrance. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determination means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state The short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery as the privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege that is less privileged than the first privilege are given. Either one is determined by the privilege determining means. When either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to a specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from that is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second benefit is easily set by the setting means by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Thereby, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The gaming machine D1 has gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states based on a predetermined condition, and the setting means has a specific gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. On the condition, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On the condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second benefit is easily determined by the setting means by the privilege determination means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect more to determine the second privilege when a specific gaming state is set.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, a setting unit that sets an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege granting unit, and the advantageous state is set by the setting unit. Based on this, the gaming machine D3 includes a control unit that makes it easy to set the advantageous state by the setting unit even when the privilege is given next.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege granting means, an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege granting means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state is easily set by the setting means even when the privilege is next given by the control means. It is easy to set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, and D1 to D3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, and the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3 The gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies a lottery of a game when a game ball enters a start opening provided on a game board surface and notifies the lottery result. Executed in If the lottery result is a win, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined to win is high after a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed is also provided at the starting point. It is executed based on the game ball being entered. When it is set to the high probability gaming state, if it is decided to shift to the normal probability gaming state in the case of winning in the high probability gaming state, a configuration to shift to the normal probability gaming is proposed. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).
By the way, in the above configuration, there is no sharpness in the game, and further improvement of the interest of the game has been demanded.
The technical idea of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game in the above gaming machine.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance. The first lottery is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance, and the player is more advantageous than the first lottery based on the game ball entering the second entrance. The lottery means for executing the second lottery, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means, and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means capable of dynamic display, respectively, and dynamic display period determination for respectively determining the dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means And a dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display determination means. Setting means capable of setting a long state in which a dynamic display period longer than a dynamic display period is easily determined and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined, and the first identification When the information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the privilege granting means are given to the player. As a privilege, based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery, a privilege determining means for determining at least one of the first privilege and a second privilege that is less granted than the first privilege; , When either the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is Specific stop display state And a setting for making the second privilege easy to be determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery when the long state is set by the setting device. Means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 has a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states based on a predetermined condition in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, On the condition that a specific gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means.
The dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determination means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state The short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery as the privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege that is less privileged than the first privilege are given. Either one is determined by the privilege determining means. When either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to a specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from that is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second benefit is easily set by the setting means by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Thereby, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On the condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second benefit is easily determined by the setting means by the privilege determination means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect more to determine the second privilege when a specific gaming state is set.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
630 left first starting port (part of the first entry means )
631 right first start opening (part of first entry means )
640 2nd starting port (second entry means)
S204, S207 part of privilege determination means, stop display means
S306, S706 dynamic display period determining means
S305, S705 lottery means
S1604 privilege grant means

Claims (2)

A first entrance where a game ball can enter and a second entrance different from the first entrance;
The first lottery is executed based on the game ball entering the first entrance, and the game is more than the first lottery based on the game ball entering the second entrance. Lottery means for executing a second lottery that is advantageous to the person;
The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means, and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means. Display means;
Dynamic display period determining means for respectively determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means;
A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as a dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display determination means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state A setting means capable of setting a short state in which the target display period is easily determined;
A privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode;
As a privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means, based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery, at least the first privilege and the second privilege that is less privileged than the first privilege are given. A privilege determining means for determining either
When either the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is specified. Stop display means for stopping display in a stop display mode different from the stop display mode of
A gaming machine comprising: setting means for easily determining the second benefit by the privilege determining means in the first lottery when the long state is set by the setting means. Game state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states based on a predetermined condition;
The setting means makes it easy to determine the second privilege by the privilege determining means in the first lottery on the condition that a specific gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images